JP7518026B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, that can be controlled to create advantageous conditions for players.

There are gaming machines in which a launcher launches gaming balls, which are gaming media, into a gaming area, and when the gaming balls enter a winning area, such as a winning slot, provided in the gaming area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player.Furthermore, there are also gaming machines (so-called pachinko machines) that are provided with a variable display device that can variably display (also called "variable") identification information, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device becomes a specific display result, the gaming state (the state of the gaming machine; specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled) is changed and a predetermined gaming value is given to the player .

The gaming value refers to the state of the variable winning ball device installed in the gaming area of the gaming machine becoming advantageous to the player in terms of making it easier for the ball to win, generating rights that lead to advantageous conditions for the player, or making it easier for the conditions for the payout of winning balls to be met.

In a pachinko game machine, a "jackpot" occurs when a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of a special pattern (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the entry of a game ball into the start winning hole. The derived display means that a pattern (final stop pattern) is finally stopped and displayed. When a jackpot occurs, for example, the big prize winning hole opens a predetermined number of times, and the game moves to a big prize game state in which the ball is more likely to win. During each opening period, if a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of big prize winning holes are won, the big prize winning hole closes. The number of times the big prize winning hole opens is fixed to a predetermined number (e.g., 15 rounds). An opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and the big prize winning hole closes when the opening time has elapsed even if the number of winning holes does not reach the predetermined number. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big prize winning hole may be called a round. Also, the game during a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in a state where a pattern other than the pattern that will be the final stop pattern (for example, the center pattern among the left, center, and right patterns) on a variable display device continues for a predetermined time and stops, oscillates, expands and contracts, or changes shape while matching a specific display result, or where multiple patterns fluctuate synchronously with the same pattern, or the positions of the displayed patterns are swapped, and the possibility of a jackpot occurring continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states), a reach effect is called a reach effect. Also, a reach state and its appearance are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, a variable display that includes a reach effect is referred to as a reach variable display. If the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it is a "miss" and the variable display state ends. The player plays while enjoying how to generate a jackpot.

Some of these gaming machines suggest that control will be performed in an advantageous state and can execute multiple types of suggestive effects with different degrees of expectation depending on the presentation mode, and use a displayed special image to change the suggestive effect to a presentation mode with a higher expectation. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that a pseudo consecutive prediction effect, a development prediction effect, or an active hold prediction effect is executed by a gift image displayed when the same type of gift box is opened. Also, for example, Patent Document 2 describes that information called "gimmick stock" is displayed on the screen to communicate to the player that a strong prediction effect in which a moving object falls will be executed later.

JP 2015-134097 A JP 2018-50980 A

There was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines having the functions and configurations described in the above patent documents.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability .

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A suggestion performance execution means for suggesting that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state and capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including at least a first suggestion performance and a second suggestion performance having different expectations depending on the performance mode;
A special image display effect execution means capable of displaying a special image;
A special effect execution means for executing a special effect that changes the suggestive effect being executed in one performance mode to a performance mode with a higher expectation than the one performance mode by using the displayed special image;
A special suggestion effect execution means is provided which is capable of executing a first special suggestion effect which suggests that the special effect will be executed and the special effect is executed after the effect, and a second special suggestion effect which suggests that the special effect will be executed and the special effect is not executed after the effect,
The special image display effect execution means displays the special image in a manner that the special image moves so as to pass through a display position of the suggestion effect that is a target of the special effect during a period before the special effect is executed,
The special effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect by a predetermined pattern of executing the special effect by changing the presentation mode of the first suggestion effect after the special image is stopped at a specific position, and a specific pattern of executing the special effect by changing the presentation mode of the second suggestion effect after the special image passes the specific position without being stopped at the specific position,
The ratio of the special effect being controlled to the advantageous state when the special effect is executed according to the predetermined pattern is different from the ratio of the special effect being executed according to the specific pattern,
The special effect execution means is capable of displaying a specific image when executing the special effect.
It is characterized by:
Such a configuration can improve marketability.
The other gaming machine is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A suggestion performance execution means that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state and is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances with different expectations depending on the performance mode (for example, a performance that displays a title display in a predetermined mode, a performance that displays an active display in a predetermined mode, a dialogue performance that displays a dialogue display in a predetermined mode, a decorative pattern performance that displays a decorative pattern in a predetermined mode, etc.);
a special image display effect execution means capable of displaying a special image (e.g., a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12); and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (e.g., a chance-up effect in which the display color of an active display is changed from a normal color (white) to blue) by using the displayed special image, the special effect changing a suggestive effect being executed in one effect mode to an effect mode with a higher expectation than the one effect mode.
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) having a display area capable of displaying images, and capable of displaying game-related information (e.g., the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols having a smaller display area than the decorative symbols) on the display area (e.g., a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J);
A storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 19-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 19-17 );
Equipped with
The storage means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (e.g., a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205),
The image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in Fig. 19-23, a portion for generating a displacement target image by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area, and applying a displacement image to the displacement target image to generate an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R are moved upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C is moved downward as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during a development suggestion performance).
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature portion 006SG) in which the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means is displayed in the display area during variable display,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged on a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area rather than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority),
The special effect execution means displays a special corresponding image (e.g., a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11) when a suggestion effect is being executed, and executes a special effect in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image (e.g., displays a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to an active display AH or a decorative pattern, and executes a chance-up effect in a manner in which a key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and rotates; see Figures 8-15 (9) to (15), Figures 8-17 (9) to 8-18 (17), etc.).
According to such a configuration, when a special performance using a special image is executed, the special image can be given a story-like quality, thereby enhancing the performance effect and increasing interest.
Furthermore, since a displaced specific image in which at least a part of a specific image displayed in a predetermined performance is displaced can be generated from image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in the specific performance, the specific performance can be executed with a smaller amount of data compared to the case where image data of the displaced specific image is stored exclusively. Also, when the specific performance is executed, the display image of the game-related information is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the specific image, which prevents a decrease in visibility of the display image of the game-related information, and improves the marketability.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. An explanatory diagram showing examples of a jackpot determination table and a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 030IW. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a configuration of a fluctuation pattern and a breakdown of a fluctuation time. FIG. This is a timing chart showing the execution timing of each performance during a super reach. An explanatory diagram showing the execution time of each performance in the first and second parts of the Super Reach. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stock effect pattern determination table. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance-up effect pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a title display change pattern determination table, an active display change pattern determination table, a dialogue display change pattern determination table, and a decorative design change pattern determination table. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a stock effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a stock effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another specific example of the stock effect. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first and second parts of a super reach. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first and second parts of a super reach. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for an active display. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for an active display. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect targeting decorative symbols. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect targeting decorative symbols. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect targeting decorative symbols. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up promotion effect (fake). 13 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of keyhole (suggested) images and keyhole (real) images for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in a performance control board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams of generation of a displacement image when a displacement image is applied to a displacement target image; 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of application of a displacement image to a displacement target image; FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a display image processing process. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a generated image and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern in the normal state, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the display mode of the decorative pattern in the time-saving state. A diagram showing the presentation form of the development suggestion presentation. A diagram showing the presentation form of the development suggestion presentation. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in the development suggestion performance. A figure showing the presentation form of a reach suggestion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of a reach suggestion presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in a reach suggestion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the revival presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the revival presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a revival performance in a modified example. A figure showing the determination ratio of the display color of a crack effect image in a revival performance in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation format of the pre-reading preview presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in a preview performance in a modified example. A figure showing the determination ratio of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-reading preview performance in a modified example. A figure showing the change pattern of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-reading preview performance in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation format of the promotion presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a promotion effect in a modified example. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an image generated in a modified example and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. FIG. A figure showing the presentation format of the promotion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation format of the promotion presentation in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form of the temporary stop suggestion presentation in a modified example. A diagram showing the presentation form of the temporary stop suggestion presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the temporary stop notification presentation in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of an image generated in the temporary stop suggestion performance and temporary stop notification in a modified example. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a display of a stereoscopic image in a modified example. FIG. A diagram showing the presentation form of the variable display preview presentation and development suggestion presentation in a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a modified example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the play area), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided that perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled vertically or updated) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, and jackpot types that allow few or no prize balls to be obtained.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance mode. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a look-ahead preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the change of the special symbols will be resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described below.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it diagnoses an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 6. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 6 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing a look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is executed when the presentation control process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, they also include one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 030IW)
Next, the characteristic feature 030IW of this embodiment will be described.

(Big hit determination table)
FIG. 8-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table and a variation pattern table. Among these, FIG. 8-1(A) is an example of a jackpot determination table used in this feature unit 030IW. As shown in FIG. 8-1(A), in this example, based on the hit determination random number, it is determined that the probability of a jackpot is about 1/300 in a low probability state, and that the probability of a jackpot is about 1/30 in a high probability state.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to that shown in FIG. 8-1(A), and the probability of winning may be different depending on whether the first special symbol changing display is executed or the second special symbol changing display is executed, for example.

In addition, for example, if the setting can be set to one of a number of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and a setting confirmation process or setting change process is executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value, the probability of winning may differ depending on which setting value is set.

In addition, multiple types of jackpots may be provided, each with a different degree of advantage. Specifically, the number of rounds in the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game may be different depending on the jackpot type. In this case, when it is decided that a jackpot has occurred based on the hit determination random number, the type of jackpot is determined based on the type determination random number.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
8-1(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 030IW. Of these, FIG. 8-1(B) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table for misses. Also, FIG. 8-1(C) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table for big wins. Note that the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIG. 8-1(B) and (C) are both used in a low probability state. In a high probability state or a high base state, a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) with a different ratio of judgment values may be used.

In this example, as shown in Figure 8-1 (B), in the event of a miss, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach A), fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach B), fluctuation pattern PA2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)), and fluctuation pattern PA2-5 (super reach B (with chance up)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1(C), when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach A), fluctuation pattern PB2-3 (super reach B), fluctuation pattern PB2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)), and fluctuation pattern PB2-5 (super reach B (with chance up)).

In this example, during a super reach after a reach is achieved, a stock effect in which an item (in this example, a key) is stocked, and a chance up effect in which the stocked item (key) is used to change the presentation mode of other effects (i.e., to increase the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by other effects) can be executed. This configuration can increase interest during a super reach, and can also heighten the sense of anticipation for the stock effect and chance up effect. Hereinafter, executing a chance up effect using a stocked item (key) is also referred to as releasing the stocked item (key).

In this example, the super reach is a series of effects that unfold after the reach is established. When the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB2-2, and PB2-3 in which the chance up effect (and the stock effect) are not performed, there are two parts during the super reach: the first half part A of the super reach in which the prelude effect that is the prelude to the battle effect is performed, and the second half part of the super reach in which the battle effect is performed. When the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB2-4, and PB2-5 in which the chance up effect (and the stock effect) are performed, there are three parts during the super reach: the super reach introduction part in which the stock effect is performed, the first half part B of the super reach in which the prelude effect and the chance up effect are performed, and the second half part of the super reach in which the battle effect is performed. With this configuration, the stock effect and the chance up effect are performed in the period before the battle effect, which is the climax of the super reach, so that the effect can be gradually heightened and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-1 (B) and (C), a Super Reach in which a Chance Up effect (and a Stock effect) is executed is configured to have a higher chance of winning than a Super Reach in which a Chance Up effect (and a Stock effect) is not executed, and furthermore, a Super Reach B is configured to have a higher chance of winning than a Super Reach A. This configuration creates anticipation as to whether a Chance Up effect (and a Stock effect) will be executed and in which Super Reach it will be executed.

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 8-1 is not limited to this, and for example, a variation pattern may be set in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once or multiple times before a super reach, and the expected probability of a jackpot may differ depending on the number of pseudo consecutive performances.

Next, the configuration of each fluctuation pattern will be described. Figure 8-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern and the breakdown of the fluctuation time. In this example, as shown in Figure 8-2, the elements that make up the fluctuation pattern (which can also be said to be the performances executed in the fluctuation pattern) are "normal fluctuation" which performs a fluctuation display in a normal manner, "shortened fluctuation" which performs a fluctuation display in a manner that is shorter than the normal fluctuation, "normal reach" which performs a normal reach as a reach performance, "super reach introduction (stock performance)" which performs a stock performance in the super reach introduction part as a reach performance, "super reach first half A (no chance up performance)" which performs a pre-outpost performance in the super reach first half part A, "super reach first half B (with chance up performance)" which performs a pre-outpost performance and a chance up performance in the super reach first half part B, "super reach second half (battle performance)" which performs a battle performance in the super reach second half part, and "win celebration performance" which performs a win celebration performance to celebrate the big win. Note that the examples shown in Figure 8-2 are not limited to those shown, and other elements such as an element that performs a pseudo consecutive performance may be provided.

As shown in Figure 8-2, fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is a fluctuation pattern that deviates from normal fluctuation, includes "normal fluctuation" (15 seconds) as an element that constitutes the fluctuation pattern, and has a total fluctuation time of 15 seconds. Fluctuation pattern PA1-2 is a fluctuation pattern that deviates from shortening fluctuation, includes "shortening fluctuation" (5 seconds) as an element that constitutes the fluctuation pattern, and has a total fluctuation time of 5 seconds.

Fluctuation pattern PA2-1 is a fluctuation pattern that goes through a normal reach and then a miss, and includes a "normal reach" (20 seconds) as an element that constitutes the fluctuation pattern, with a total fluctuation time of 20 seconds.

Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 are fluctuation patterns that go through the first half part A of the super reach where no chance up effect is executed, and the second half part of the super reach, resulting in a miss. The elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include "first half A of the super reach (no chance up effect)" (30 seconds) and "second half of the super reach (battle effect)" (40 seconds), and the total fluctuation time is 70 seconds.

Fluctuating patterns PA2-4 and PA2-5 are fluctuation patterns that go through the Super Reach introduction part, the Super Reach first half part B where the chance up effect is executed, and the Super Reach second half part, before ending in a miss. The elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include "Super Reach introduction (stock effect)" (30 seconds), "Super Reach first half B (with chance up effect)" (40 seconds), and "Super Reach second half (battle effect)" (40 seconds), with a total fluctuation time of 110 seconds.

Fluctuating pattern PB2-1 is a fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach leads to a jackpot, and the elements that make up the fluctuation pattern include a "normal reach" (20 seconds) and a "celebration effect when a win occurs" (20 seconds), with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds.

Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 are fluctuation patterns that go through the first half part A of the super reach where no chance up effect is executed, and the second half part of the super reach, leading to a jackpot. The elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include the "first half A of the super reach (no chance up effect)" (30 seconds), the "second half of the super reach (battle effect)" (40 seconds), and the "celebration effect when a hit occurs" (20 seconds), and the total fluctuation time is 90 seconds.

Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns PB2-4 and PB2-5 are fluctuation patterns that go through the Super Reach introduction part, the Super Reach first half part B where the chance up effect is executed, and the Super Reach second half part, leading to a jackpot, and the elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include "Super Reach introduction (stock effect)" (30 seconds), "Super Reach first half B (with chance up effect)" (40 seconds), "Super Reach second half (battle effect)" (40 seconds), and "Hit celebration effect" (20 seconds), with a total fluctuation time of 130 seconds.

In the example shown in Figure 8-2, the performance times of the first half and second half of the Super Reach are the same for Super Reach A and Super Reach B, but this configuration is not limited to this, and the performance times may differ depending on the type of Super Reach.

(The timing of each performance during Super Reach)
Next, the execution timing of the stock effect and the chance-up effect will be described. FIG. 8-3 is a timing chart showing an example of the execution timing of each effect.

In this example, the fluctuation time (which can also be said to be the total performance execution time) is determined by the fluctuation pattern determined on the main board 11 side, and the execution timing and performance execution time of the stock performance and chance up performance are determined based on the fluctuation pattern on the performance control board 12 side. However, as will be described in detail later, depending on the type of performance, the execution timing may be predetermined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Note that, without being limited to the configuration of this example, a fluctuation pattern may be set in which the execution timing and performance execution time of the stock performance and chance up performance are predetermined, and one of the fluctuation patterns may be determined on the main board 11 side.

Figure 8-3 (A) shows a case where a super reach without chance up is executed. In this case, as shown in Figure 8-3 (A), a pre-outpost performance is executed in the first half part A of the super reach, and a battle performance is executed in the second half part of the super reach.

Figure 8-3 (B) shows a case where a super reach with chance up is executed. In this case, a stock effect is executed first in the super reach introductory part. Then, in the first half part B of the super reach, a chance up effect is executed together with an outpost effect. Then, in the second half part of the super reach, a battle effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-3(B), in this example, there are three opportunities to stock items (keys) at maximum, A to C during the stock effect (timings (A) to (C) shown in FIG. 8-3(B)). Note that in this example, there are three opportunities to stock items (keys) during the stock effect, but this is not limited to the above configuration, and there may be a maximum of two or less, or four or more.

In addition, in this example, the title display (a presentation that displays a title display), active display (a presentation that displays an active display), dialogue display (a dialogue presentation that displays a dialogue display), and decorative pattern (a decorative pattern presentation that displays a decorative pattern) in the first half of the Super Reach each suggest different odds of a jackpot depending on the presentation mode, and are configured so that when the corresponding chance-up presentation is executed, the presentation mode changes (i.e., the suggested odds of a jackpot increase).

Specifically, when one item (key) is stocked in the stock performance, a chance-up performance is executed once for any of the title display (performance that displays the title display), active display (performance that displays the active display), dialogue display (speech performance that displays the dialogue display), and decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays the decorative pattern); when two items (keys) are stocked in the stock performance, a chance-up performance is executed once for each of two of the title display (performance that displays the title display), active display (performance that displays the active display), dialogue display (speech performance that displays the dialogue display), and decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays the decorative pattern); when three items (keys) are stocked in the stock performance, a chance-up performance is executed once for each of three of the title display (performance that displays the title display), active display (performance that displays the active display), dialogue display (speech performance that displays the dialogue display), and decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays the decorative pattern). Note that this is not limited to the configuration of this example, and chance-up performance may be executed multiple times for one performance. In this case, each time a chance-up effect is performed, a stocked item (key) is released.

As shown in FIG. 8-3(B), in this example, first to fifth timings (timings (1) to (5) shown in FIG. 8-3(B)) are provided as timings at which chance-up effects can be executed in the first half of the super reach. Note that in this example, the first to fifth timings in the first half of the super reach are determined for each variation pattern (or each type of super reach), but they may be common timings for all variation patterns (or types of super reach).

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), the chance-up effect targeting the title display (the effect that displays the title display) can be executed at the first timing, the chance-up effect targeting the active display (the effect that displays the active display) can be executed at the second or fourth timing, the chance-up effect targeting the dialogue display (the dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display) can be executed at the third timing, and the chance-up effect targeting the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) can be executed at the fifth timing.

Whether the chance-up effect for the active display (effect that displays the active display) is executed at the second timing or the fourth timing is determined by lottery. On the other hand, the timing at which the chance-up effect for the title display (effect that displays the title display), the dialogue display (dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display), or the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) is executed is fixedly determined for each variation pattern. Note that this configuration is not limited to this, and the timing at which the chance-up effect for the active display (effect that displays the active display) is executed may be fixedly determined, or the timing at which the chance-up effect for the title display (effect that displays the title display), the dialogue display (dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display), or the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) is executed may be determined by lottery to be one of multiple timings.

The execution order of the effects that are the subject of the Chance Up Effects is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-3, and may be other orders. However, it is desirable that the later the order that the effect is the subject of the Chance Up Effects, the more likely it is that the Chance Up Effects will increase the likelihood of a jackpot (for example, the more likely it is that the effect will change to one with a higher chance of a jackpot). This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the timing at which the Chance Up Effects will be executed, and prevents players who have high hopes for the timing of the change (for example, their hopes grow as the first half of the Super Reach progresses) from being disappointed.

In this example, when the chance-up effect is executed during a super reach, the stock effect is always executed, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a pattern in which the chance-up effect is executed without the stock effect may also exist. In this case, for example, a variation pattern including the stock effect and the chance-up effect and a variation pattern including the chance-up effect without the stock effect are provided in advance, and when the main board 11 side determines the former variation pattern, the performance control board 12 side determines the performance contents of the stock effect and the chance-up effect according to the modes shown in Figures 8-5 to 8-8, which will be described later, based on the determined variation pattern, and when the main board 11 side determines the latter variation pattern, the performance control board 12 side determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect and the type of chance-up effect to be executed based on the determined variation pattern. In this way, by providing a pattern in which the chance-up effect is executed without the stock effect being executed, the presence of the chance-up effect is increased, and the player can enjoy the performance with a sense of superiority in a situation in which the chance-up effect is visualized as being executed in the future. Furthermore, in such cases, the system can be configured so that the probability of a large number of chance-up effects being executed is higher when the stock effect is executed in advance than when it is not executed (i.e., the chance-up effect can be configured to increase the likelihood of a big win), giving priority to the execution of the stock effect and creating anticipation for the execution of the stock effect.

In addition, in this example, in a super reach, there is always a first half part of the super reach and a second half part of the super reach, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, when a stock effect is executed, the first half part of the super reach can be omitted, and the second half part of the super reach can follow the super reach introduction part, and a chance-up effect can be executed in the second half part. This configuration can prevent the total effect execution time of a reach with high expectations from becoming too long.

When providing an exceptional pattern in which the first half of the super reach is omitted, in the basic pattern that is not omitted, it is desirable that when the first half of the super reach develops into the second half of the super reach, other performance images are displayed in a manner that covers all the performance images related to the super reach at the boundary between the first and second halves, or that the performance contents are clearly divided between the first and second halves. For example, at the boundary between the first and second halves, an effect image or character related to the chance up performance shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) described later, or an image such as the text display of "Pending Rank Up" may be displayed in a manner that covers all the performance images related to the super reach. Also, for example, the performance contents may be divided by executing an outpost performance in the first half and executing a battle performance in the second half, or the performance contents may be divided by displaying a battle scene in the first half and a conclusion scene such as a character unleashing a special move in the second half. By doing so, even when the first half of the super reach is omitted, the flow of the performance can be made natural.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-3, for convenience, the intervals between the timing of stocking and the timing of the chance-up effect are uniform, but they do not have to be uniform and can be any timing within the period.

(Execution time of each performance in Super Reach)
Next, the execution time of each effect in the super reach will be described. FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the first and second parts of the super reach.

Of the examples shown in Figure 8-4, Figure 8-4 (A) shows an example in which a chance-up effect is executed for the title display (a performance that displays the title display) at the first timing (timing (1) shown in Figure 8-4) of the first half of the super reach, a chance-up effect is executed for the dialogue display (a dialogue performance that displays the dialogue display) at the third timing (timing (3) shown in Figure 8-4), and a chance-up effect is executed for the decorative pattern (a decorative pattern performance that displays a decorative pattern) at the fifth timing (timing (5) shown in Figure 8-4) (corresponding to the eighth performance pattern of the chance-up effect described below).

In addition, Figure 8-4 (B) shows an example in which a chance-up effect is executed for the title display (a performance that displays the title display) at the first timing of the first half of the super reach, and a chance-up effect is executed for the decorative pattern (a decorative pattern performance that displays a decorative pattern) at the fifth timing (corresponding to the seventh performance pattern of the chance-up effect described below).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4, in the latter part of the super reach, a moving body effect is executed in which the moving body 32 operates before the fluctuation ends (for example, when announcing that control is being given to a jackpot).

In this example, as shown in the case where a dialogue effect without a chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-4(A) and the case where a dialogue effect with a chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect is configured to have a longer execution time when the effect mode changes due to the chance-up effect than when the effect mode does not change due to the chance-up effect. Specifically, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(B). With this configuration, when the chance-up effect is executed, a period for executing the chance-up effect and its target effect (for example, a period for announcing the change and the effect mode after the change) can be secured.

If the performance execution time of a performance were to change depending on whether or not a Chance Up performance is present, this would affect the execution timing of other performances, which could increase the amount of data related to performance control and complicate processing. Also, because the variable time (i.e. the total performance execution time) is fixedly determined in advance for each variable pattern, there is a risk that the performance will not fit within the time limit, or that there will be excess time. Therefore, in this example, the execution period of the movable body performance is made different depending on whether or not a Chance Up performance is present, thereby minimizing the impact on other performances and ensuring that all performances fit within the time limit without feeling unnatural.

In other words, in this example, the performance execution time T11 of the dialogue performance shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the performance execution time T12 of the dialogue performance shown in FIG. 8-4(B), while the performance execution time T21 of the movable body performance shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is shorter than the performance execution time T12 of the movable body performance shown in FIG. 8-4(B). And, the performance execution time of the chance-up performance targeting the decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays decorative patterns) is the same.

For example, the movable body performance is controlled by moving the movable body 32 from the initial position to a performance position in front of the display area of the image display device 5 and keeping it at that performance position for a predetermined period of time, and controlling the image display device 5 to display an effect image or the like during the predetermined period to emphasize the movable body performance (at this time, the movable body 32 itself may be made to operate at the performance position), and then controlling the movable body 32 to move from the performance position to the initial position. In this way, the performance execution time of the movable body performance can be adjusted by lengthening or shortening the period during which the movable body 32 is at the performance position. By adjusting the performance execution time of the movable body performance in this way, it is possible to respond to small changes in the performance time depending on whether or not there is a chance up. With this configuration, while the performance execution time of the performance changes depending on whether or not there is a chance up performance, it is possible to prevent the amount of data related to the performance control from increasing and the processing from becoming complicated, and to fit all the performances within the time without any sense of incongruity.

The adjustment of the presentation time may be performed, for example, in a presentation other than the moving body presentation. For example, if the variable display result is a miss and the moving body presentation is not executed before the end of the variation, the presentation image related to the super reach may be returned to the normal background image before the end of the variation, and then the time for which the decorative pattern indicating a miss is temporarily stopped may be lengthened or shortened for adjustment.

In this example, the chance-up effect can be executed multiple times, and the execution time is configured to differ depending on the chance-up effect being executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), chance-up effects that target decorative symbols have a longer execution time than chance-up effects that target title displays or dialogue displays. Although details will be described later, chance-up effects that target decorative symbols have a higher chance of winning than chance-up effects that target title displays or dialogue displays, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced by extending the execution time. With this configuration, various chance-up effects can be executed with suitable execution times, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this example, when one chance-up effect targeting one effect is being executed, other chance-up effects targeting other effects are not executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, chance-up effects with different targets are executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the chance-up effect being executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-5 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 030IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 030IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 030IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 030IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo-series is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines, in step 030IWS802, a chance eye pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that is one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445", which is not a reach but is not a jackpot pattern, or a combination of patterns in which the middle pattern is a special pattern exclusive to pseudo-series (a pattern in which letters such as "NEXT" are written, but no numbers are written, and which cannot form a jackpot combination)) as a temporary stopping pattern during the pseudo-series. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stopping pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 030IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot is reached based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach performance is involved, a combination of decorative symbols where the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variation pattern includes a Super Reach (with Chance Up) (step 030IWS803). If the variation pattern does not include a Super Reach (with Chance Up), the process proceeds to step 030IWS811.

If the variation pattern includes a super reach (with chance up), the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern of the stock performance (step 030IWS804). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern of the chance up performance (step 030IWS805). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance mode after the change of the performance that is the target of the chance up performance (step 030IWS806). After that, the process proceeds to step 030IWS811. Details of steps 030IWS804, S805, and S806 will be described later.

In step 030IWS811, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the determined content of the performance (step 030IWS811).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 030IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 80. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 030IWS813). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the turning on and off of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

Step 030: By executing the processing of IWS813, a performance is realized according to the variation pattern and the content decided to be executed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 030IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 030IWS815).

Next, we will explain the details of the process for determining the presentation pattern of the stock presentation in the variable display start setting process (step 030IWS804).

In step 030IWS804, the stock effect pattern is determined, for example, by referring to the stock effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B).

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach A (with chance up) fluctuation pattern PA2-4 or PB2-4, the first stock performance pattern determination table (Super Reach A) shown in Figure 8-6 (A) is referenced to determine the first performance pattern in which one item (key) is stocked as the performance result, or one of the second and third performance patterns in which two items (keys) are stocked as the performance result.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up), the second stock effect pattern determination table (Super Reach B) shown in Figure 8-6 (B) is referenced to determine the first effect pattern in which one item (key) is stocked as the effect result, the second or third effect pattern in which two items (keys) are stocked as the effect result, or the fourth or fifth effect pattern in which three items (keys) are stocked as the effect result.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-3 and 8-6, there are opportunities to stock items (keys) at timing A, timing B, and timing C during the stock performance. For example, in the first performance pattern, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, and no items (keys) are stocked at timing B and timing C. Also, for example, in the fifth performance pattern, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no items (keys) are stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C. In this way, in this example, there are opportunities to stock one or multiple items (keys) at each timing.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B), each performance pattern of the stock performance is configured to have a different probability of being determined at the time of a jackpot. In other words, the expected probability of a jackpot is configured to differ depending on the number of items (keys) stocked and the timing of stocking. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the performance patterns of the stock performance.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B), the display patterns of the stock effects that can be determined are different for Super Reach A and Super Reach B. Specifically, in Super Reach A, a maximum of two items (keys) can be stocked, and in Super Reach B, a maximum of three items (keys) can be stocked. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to which type of Super Reach will result in the stock effect.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B), the game is configured so that an item (key) is stocked at timing A regardless of the presentation pattern (in other words, when the stock presentation is executed, at least one item (key) is stocked). This configuration can prevent the player from losing all expectations for the stock presentation or losing interest in the stock presentation due to cases where an item is not stocked even when the stock presentation is executed.

In this example, the probability of a big win is higher when the stock effect is executed than when it is not executed, so the player is likely to expect the stock effect to occur. Therefore, for example, in the normal reach before the start of the super reach (the state in which the left and right symbols are ready and the middle symbol is changing on the image display device 5), a symbol that suggests that the stock effect will be executed or a symbol that teases whether it will be executed or not may be executed. For example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal reach state, a special symbol such as a "key stock time symbol" may be stopped as the middle symbol to transition to the stock effect. Also, for example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal reach state, the middle symbol may start to change at high speed, and after the screen is switched to the super reach (covering the display area of the image display device 5 by whiteout, etc.), the transition may be made to the stock effect instead of the first half part of the super reach (the outpost effect).

Next, we will explain the details of the process (step 030IWS805) that determines the presentation pattern for the chance-up presentation in the variable display start setting process.

In step 030IWS805, for example, the chance-up effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 8-7 (A) to (E) is referenced to determine the chance-up effect pattern.

Specifically, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 or PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, the first chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach A: 1 chance up) shown in Figure 8-7 (A) is referenced to determine one of the first to third performance patterns that will perform the chance up performance once.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 or PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, the second chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach A: Chance Up 2 times) shown in Figure 8-7 (B) is referenced to determine one of the fifth to sixth performance patterns in which the chance up performance is performed twice.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, the third chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach B: 1 chance up) shown in Figure 8-7 (C) is referenced to determine one of the first to fourth performance patterns that will perform the chance up performance once.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, the fourth chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach B: Chance Up twice) shown in Figure 8-7 (D) is referenced to determine one of the fifth to seventh performance patterns in which the chance up performance is performed twice.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is either of the fluctuation patterns PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 3, the 5th chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach B: Chance Up 3 times) shown in Figure 8-7 (E) is referenced to determine the 8th performance pattern in which the chance up performance is performed 3 times.

For example, in the first presentation pattern of the chance-up presentation, a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the title display (presentation that displays the title display) is executed once. Also, for example, in the eighth presentation pattern of the chance-up presentation, a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the title display (presentation that displays the title display), a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the dialogue display (dialogue presentation that displays the dialogue display), and a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern presentation that displays a decorative pattern) are each executed.

In this example, before the chance-up effect is executed, a chance-up prompting effect is executed to prompt whether or not the chance-up effect will be executed. There are chance-up prompting effects in which the chance-up effect is executed after the effect and those in which it is not executed, and when distinguishing between the two, the former are also called chance-up prompting effects (true) and the latter chance-up prompting effects (false).

In the chance-up teasing performance (true), an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to the stocked item (key) (e.g., keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13) is displayed, and then an image showing a keyhole (e.g., keyhole (real) image 030IWG11) is displayed. On the other hand, in the chance-up teasing performance (false), an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to the stocked item (key) (e.g., keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13) is displayed, and then an image showing a keyhole (e.g., keyhole (real) image 030IWG11) is not displayed, and the image suggesting a keyhole (e.g., keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13) is erased.

In this example, a chance-up teasing effect (true) is always executed before a chance-up effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-7, for example, in the fourth and seventh chance-up effect patterns, a chance-up teasing effect (false) is executed that teases whether or not a chance-up effect targeting a dialogue display (a dialogue effect that displays a dialogue display) will be executed, but which ultimately will not be executed. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to which effect the chance-up effect will be executed. Note that, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-7, a chance-up teasing effect (false) may be executed when a chance-up effect is not executed and there are still stocked items (keys) remaining.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-7 (A) to (E), each presentation pattern of the chance-up effects is configured to have a different probability of being determined at the time of a jackpot (i.e., different jackpot expectation). This configuration allows players to focus on the presentation pattern of the chance-up effects. In particular, the later the timing of the change that is the subject of the chance-up effects (i.e., in the order of decorative pattern change > dialogue display change > title display change), the higher the jackpot expectation. This configuration allows players to focus on which chance-up effects are executed at which timing.

In addition, in this example, the chance-up effect, which changes the presentation mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern presentation that displays decorative patterns), is not executed during Super Reach A, but is configured to be executable only during Super Reach B. This configuration allows you to pay attention to which type of Super Reach the chance-up effect is executed during.

It should be noted that the presenter may be configured to be able to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol presentation that displays a decorative symbol) during any type of super reach, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-7. In addition, in this example, the presenter is configured to execute a maximum of three chance-up effects, but the presenter is not limited to this configuration and may execute a maximum of four chance-up effects corresponding to all possible target effects, or may execute a chance-up effect targeting the active display at both the second and fourth timings, so that a maximum of five chance-up effects can be executed.

Next, we will explain the details of the process (step 030IWS806) that determines the presentation mode after the change in the presentation that is the target of the chance-up presentation in the variable display start setting process.

In step 030IWS806, if it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the title display (presentation that displays the title display), the change pattern is determined by referring to the title display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(A). Also, if it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the active display (presentation that displays the active display), the change pattern is determined by referring to the active display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(B). Also, if it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the dialogue display (dialogue presentation that displays the dialogue display), the change pattern is determined by referring to the dialogue display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(C). Also, if it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern presentation that displays the decorative pattern), the change pattern is determined by referring to the decorative pattern change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(D).

In this example, the title display (a presentation that displays the title display), active display (a presentation that displays the active display), dialogue display (a dialogue presentation that displays the dialogue display) and decorative pattern (a decorative pattern presentation that displays a decorative pattern) are configured so that the color tone of the presentation image related to the presentation suggests the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, the following colors are configured to suggest that the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the order of gold > red > green > blue > normal color (white).

When the first change pattern is selected as the title display change pattern, the title display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, and when the second change pattern is selected, the title display changes from the normal color (white) to green.

In addition, if the first change pattern is determined as the active display change pattern, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to blue at the first timing of the first half of the super reach, if the second change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the first timing, if the third change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the third timing, and if the fourth change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to red at the third timing.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a look-ahead preview effect that changes the pending display (and the active display), a chance-up effect targeting the active display may be executed according to the performance pattern (for example, the timing of the change and the display state after the change are determined) that is determined as the look-ahead preview effect at the time of the initial winning.

When the first change pattern is determined as the change pattern for the dialogue display, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, when the second change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to green, and when the third change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to red.

In addition, if the change pattern of the decorative design is determined to be the first change pattern, the decorative design will change from the normal color (white) to green, if the second change pattern is determined, the decorative design will change from the normal color (white) to red, and if the third change pattern is determined, the decorative design will change from the normal color (white) to gold.

In this example, when the presentation mode of the target presentation changes due to the chance-up presentation, the tendency of the presentation mode after the change is configured to differ depending on the timing of the change. Specifically, the chance-up presentation targeted at the active display is configured to be more likely to change to a presentation mode with a higher expectation at the third timing, which is later than the first timing. Also, the chance-up presentation targeted at the decorative pattern is configured to be executed later and to be more likely to change to a presentation mode with a higher expectation than the chance-up presentation targeted at the title display, active display, or dialogue display. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the timing at which the chance-up presentation will be executed, and to prevent disappointment for players who have high expectations for the timing of the change (for example, expectations grow as the first half of the super reach progresses).

In addition, if the color displayed after the change at an earlier timing suggests a higher expectation level than the color displayed after the change at a later timing, the presentation mode (color) displayed after the change at the later timing may be re-determined so as not to cause a drop in expectation level.

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the Super Reach effect including the stock effect and the chance up effect will be described. Figures 8-9 to 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the stock effect. In Figures 8-9 to 8-10, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

(Stock effect (fifth effect pattern))
Figures 8-9 to 8-10 show the stock presentation of the fifth presentation pattern, in which one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C.

Specifically, when the variable display starts and a reach is achieved, a decorative pattern showing "6" is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5. Then, when the stock performance starts, the title display of the stock performance, "Key Stock" and "TIME", is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1). Note that the display mode of the title display may suggest the number of items (keys) to be stocked in the stock performance that starts later, or that a large number of items (keys) will be stocked. For example, the title display is generally displayed in a normal color (white), but when it is displayed in red, it may suggest that a larger number of items (keys) will be stocked than when it is displayed in a normal color (white).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), except during special effects, the active display AH is displayed as the active display in the lower left part of the display area of the image display device 5, and the small symbol KZ corresponding to the special symbol and the reserved memory number HS indicating the number of reserved memories are displayed in the center right part of the display area of the image display device 5.

Next, when the stock effect starts, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), a timer image 030IWG01 indicating the remaining time of the stock effect and a "Key Stock Time" display 030IWG02 indicating that the stock effect is in progress are displayed. Furthermore, when timing A of the stock effect arrives, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), character A prompting the user to press push button 31B, the valid operation period, and an image resembling push button 31B are displayed.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, one key is stocked at timing A, so when a press of push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), the text display "Stock x 1," indicating that one key has been stocked as an item, an image resembling a key, and an effect image emphasizing them are displayed in a manner that covers the background image, as shown in Figure 8-9 (3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (4), a visual effect is displayed in which one key moves from the top left to the bottom right of the screen of the image display device and is stored (for example, a display in which it appears as if the key is flying in from the back left of the screen and being stored in the front right of the screen).

When the display showing the keys being stocked ends, a display showing the progress of the stock display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (5). Specifically, a display showing character A riding a swing is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining time shown in the timer image 030IWG01 is displayed decreasing. At this time, a stock key image 030G03 is also displayed, showing the number of keys currently stocked.

Next, at timing B of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (6), character A is displayed to prompt the player to press push button 31B, along with an image of the valid operation period and push button 31B. Note that in this example, a display prompting the player to press push button 31B is displayed at timings A, B, and C of the stock effect, and character A's pose is configured to be different for each. Therefore, even if the display prompting the player to press the push button is displayed multiple times, the player's interest can be increased at each timing without becoming bored.

In the stock presentation of the fifth presentation pattern, keys are not stocked at timing B, so when a press of push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in FIG. 8-9 (7), an image of a close-up of character A's face, the character "!?", and an effect image that emphasizes them are displayed in a manner that covers the background image, and no image indicating that keys will be stocked is displayed.

In this way, by executing an effect in which a character image is displayed instead of a key when no keys are stocked, the disappointment of not being able to stock a key can be reduced. In addition, in the stock effect of this example, even if only one key is stocked, the effect execution time is the same as when three keys are stocked. Therefore, if there is a period of time when no keys are stocked even when the button is pressed, the effect may become redundant and interest may decrease. Therefore, by displaying a character image instead of a key when no keys are stocked in this way to liven up the effect, the stock effect does not lose excitement even when the number of keys stocked is small. Note that the character image displayed when no keys are stocked may not be of one type, but may be different depending on the type of super reach being executed. By doing so, future developments can be predicted by the displayed character image, and the character image can be given a meaning in terms of the effect.

The effect display shown in FIG. 8-9(7) is performed when no keys are stocked (i.e., indicates that no keys are stocked), so after the image displayed in the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9(7) is erased, the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9(8) in which the stock effect progresses is displayed, but the number of stocked keys indicated by the stock key image 030G03 does not increase. Note that the display period for the effect display when an item is stocked shown in FIG. 8-9(3) is set shorter than the display period for the effect display when an item is not stocked shown in FIG. 8-9(7). This configuration makes it possible to prevent players from feeling annoyed or losing interest by displaying undesirable effects for a long time without the effect of increasing the number of stocks.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (9), a display showing the progress of the stock effect is displayed, and when timing C of the stock effect arrives, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (10), character A prompting the user to press push button 31B, the valid operation period, and an image resembling push button 31B are displayed.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, two keys are stocked at timing C, so when a press of push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in Figure 8-10 (11), the text display "Stock x 2" indicating that two keys have been stocked as items, an image resembling a key, and an effect image emphasizing them are displayed in a manner that covers the background image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (12), an effect display is performed in which two keys move from the top left to the bottom right of the screen of the image display device and are stored (for example, a display in which the keys appear to fly in from the back left of the screen and be stored in the front right of the screen).

When the display showing the stocking of keys ends, a display showing the progress of the stocking display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (13). Then, when the remaining time shown in timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (14), a display prompting the user to press push button 31B is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (15).

When a press of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in FIG. 8-10 (16), the text display "Character A VS Enemy Character B" indicating the battle cards in the battle performance, as well as Character A and Enemy Character B, are displayed, and the stock performance ends.

In this example, when a super reach with chance up is executed, a stock effect is first executed in the super reach introductory part. Then, in the first half of the super reach, a prelude effect such as a dialogue effect in which character A and enemy character B face each other and talk is executed primarily, and a chance up effect is executed incidentally. After that, in the second half of the super reach, a battle effect in which character A and enemy character B cross swords is executed. Note that, when a super reach without chance up is executed, a prelude effect such as a dialogue effect in which character A and enemy character B face each other and talk is executed in the first half of the super reach, and a battle effect in which character A and enemy character B cross swords is executed in the second half of the super reach.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10 (16), the match card for the battle performance is "character A vs. enemy character B", but in reality, multiple types of match cards (different types of friendly and enemy characters) are provided, and the match card is determined according to the type of super reach. That is, the pressing of the push button 31B triggers the display of the match card for the battle performance, thereby announcing the type of super reach. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation and tension when the push button 31B is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 8-10 (15). For example, in addition to or instead of the type of super reach, the types of friendly and enemy characters may be different depending on the expectation of a jackpot. Also, for example, if the performance stage is configured to transition depending on the game period or game state, such as the number of changes, a character previously associated with the performance stage may be made to fight against one of the enemy characters (which may be one of multiple enemy characters previously associated with the performance stage, or may be an enemy character determined by lottery).

(Stock effect (first effect pattern))
Next, we will explain the stock presentation of the first presentation pattern in which one item (key) is stocked at timing A, and no item (key) is stocked at timing B and timing C, resulting in one key being stocked.

When the stock effect of the first effect pattern is executed, after the screen transitions of Figures 8-9 (1) to (8), a stock key image 030G03 indicating that one key is stocked is displayed as shown in Figure 8-11 (9), and an effect display showing the progress of the stock effect is displayed. Then, as shown in Figure 8-11 (10), when the remaining time shown in the timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, a display is displayed encouraging the user to press the push button 31B as shown in Figure 8-11 (11).

When a press of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in FIG. 8-11 (12), the text display "Character A VS Enemy Character B" indicating the battle cards in the battle performance, as well as Character A and Enemy Character B, are displayed, and the stock performance ends.

(Overview of the first and second half of Super Reach)
Next, an overview of the effects in the first and second parts of the Super Reach will be explained. Figures 8-12 to 8-13 are explanatory diagrams showing an overview of the effects in the first and second parts of the Super Reach. In Figures 8-12 to 8-13, the effects screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

When the Super Reach introductory part (stock effect) ends and the first half of the Super Reach begins, the title of Super Reach B, "A Deadly Battle Between Two People," is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-12 (1).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (1), a mini character A image 030IWC10 and a mini key image 030IWG10 of the number of keys stocked in the stock effect are displayed in the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5. In this example, it is assumed that three keys have been stocked in advance in the stock effect, and the three keys are displayed in a manner that moves around the mini character A. Note that in this example, the keys stocked in the stock effect of the super reach introduction part are displayed as a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12 in the first half of the super reach.

In addition, a decorative pattern indicating "6" is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5, and an active display AH is displayed at the lower left side of the display area of the image display device 5 as an active display, and a small pattern KZ corresponding to the special pattern and a reserved memory number HS indicating the number of reserved memories are displayed at the center right side of the display area of the image display device 5.

Next, as a prelude, as shown in FIG. 8-12(2), character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other, and after that, as shown in FIG. 8-12(3), line image 030IWG20 is displayed saying "I'll kill you!"

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (4), character A image 030IWC01 is displayed alone, along with a line image 030IWG20 saying "I won't go easy on you."

As shown in Figures 8-12 (2) to (4), when the chance-up effect is not being executed during the execution of the prelude effect, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

When a chance-up effect targeting a dialogue effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (5), a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 resembling a keyhole is displayed overlapping the dialogue image 030IWG20. Also at this time, a mini-character A image 030IWC10 holding a key is displayed next to the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11. This type of effect display indicates that the target of the chance-up effect is a dialogue effect.

Next, to display the effect of the key being inserted into the keyhole, the key image 030IWG12 and keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-12 (6), and then, to display the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened), the key image 030IWG12 rotated in the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-12 (7).

When the key turns in the keyhole (i.e., the lock is opened), the dialogue image 030IWG20 changes from the normal color (white) to blue, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (8). This type of dialogue display changes the dialogue presentation as a result of the chance-up presentation.

After that, when the first half of the Super Reach (the outpost effect and the chance up effect) ends and the second half of the Super Reach begins, a battle effect begins in which character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02 cross swords, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (9).

When character A wins against enemy character A, the word "Victory" is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-13 (10), and then the combination of "666" decorative symbols, which is the jackpot symbol, is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-13 (11).

(Chance Up Production)
Next, the chance-up effect outlined in Fig. 8-12 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 8-14 to Fig. 8-18. Fig. 8-14 to Fig. 8-18 also show the part of the chance-up effect that is omitted in Fig. 8-12.

Figures 8-14 to 8-15 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of chance-up effects that target active displays. Note that in Figures 8-14 to 8-15, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), an outpost display is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face off against each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), a display is executed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. Also, at this time, a display is executed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Note that the performance images related to the outpost performance (e.g., character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in Figure 8-14 (1) and onwards, but are omitted from the illustration for simplicity. In this example, the performance images related to the outpost performance have a lower display priority than performance images related to the chance up performance (e.g., key image, keyhole image, mini character image, etc.) and performance images related to the performance that is the target of the chance up performance (e.g., title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and are displayed in a lower layer than those images. The details will be described later, but the performance images related to the outpost performance are covered by the performance images related to the chance up performance at the timing of Figure 8-15 (13) to (14).

Next, when the chance-up teasing performance (true) is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (2), a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13, which suggests that a keyhole will appear, is displayed in the center of the display area. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 stop moving around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10. In addition, an "!" is displayed next to the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 to indicate the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (3), a display effect begins in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the active display AH that is the target of the chance-up effect, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (5), a display effect is performed in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 overlaps the active display AH. At this time, triangular marks are displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 to indicate that it is shrinking.

Also, as shown in Figures 8-14 (2) to (5), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the chance-up teasing effect and the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (6), the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette on the active display AH, and a performance display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 also become a silhouette, and a performance display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (7), a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 that resembles a keyhole is displayed on the active display AH. This type of effect display makes it clear that the chance-up promotion effect being executed is a chance-up promotion effect (true), and also makes it clear that the target of the chance-up promotion effect is the active display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(8), an effect is displayed in which character A, located at the front of the screen, throws a key into keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, located at the back of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15(9), an effect is displayed in which key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front of the screen toward keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 at the back. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-15(9), key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed at a size larger than keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, and then, as shown in FIG. 8-15(10), it is displayed as if it is moving toward keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller to represent moving away). This configuration draws attention to the key image 030IWG12 acting on the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, enhancing the presentation effect of the chance-up presentation.

Then, to display the effect of the key being inserted into the keyhole, a key image 030IWG12 and a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-15 (11), and to display the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened), a key image 030IWG12 rotated in the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-15 (12).

When the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), character A and the text "Pending Rank Up" are displayed along with an effect image that covers the image related to the outpost effect. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), by displaying a close-up of character A along with an effect image that covers the image related to the outpost effect, the awkward feeling of a chance-up effect being executed in the middle of the outpost effect is reduced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14), character A and the text display "Pending Rank Up" are erased while the effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect is still displayed, the active display AH becomes a silhouette, and an effect display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed again, and an effect display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it.

In this example, when a chance-up effect targeting an active display is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14), the image display device 5 displays in the upper layers in the following order: decorative pattern > mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 > effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect > active display AH > image related to the outpost effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (15), the effect image covering the image related to the outpost performance is erased, and the active display AH is displayed in a color that has changed from the normal color (white) to blue. Also, because one of the stocks has been released and an item (key) has been consumed due to the chance-up performance targeting the active display, the number of mini key images 030IWG10 moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10 has decreased by one.

In this example, when a performance that is the target of the chance-up performance is being performed, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed, and the chance-up performance is performed in a manner in which the key image 030IWG12 acts on the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11. Specifically, as shown in Figs. 8-14 to 8-15, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, and the chance-up performance is performed in a manner in which the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and rotates. With this configuration, when a chance-up performance using the key image 030IWG12 is performed, the performance effect can be enhanced by providing a story-like element in which the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and rotates (i.e., the key is opened), and the interest can be increased.

In addition, in this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed approximately in the center of the effect image related to the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect (see, for example, FIG. 8-14 (7)), and when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed, a chance-up effect that targets other effects is not executed. For example, when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, a chance-up effect that targets the dialogue display is not executed. This configuration makes it easier to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the chance-up effect, and also draws attention to the timing at which the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed.

In this example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (8), the stored key image and character image (i.e., mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10) are displayed moving, and when the chance-up effect is executed, an effect is displayed in which the character throws a key into the keyhole. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the key image and to enhance the effect of the chance-up effect.

In this example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (6), the mini key image 030IWG10 moves in a manner that revolves around the mini character A image 030IWC10, and stops moving when the chance-up effect is executed. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the key image and to enhance the effect of the chance-up effect.

In this example, the key is configured to look different when it is stocked and when it is used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (8), when the key image is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area in the stock performance, the key image is displayed smaller in size than when the key image is displayed moving around the character in the outpost performance as shown in FIG. 8-12 (1). This configuration makes it possible to make the key image easier to see in the stock performance in which the key is the main focus, and to make the key less conspicuous when the outpost performance is the main focus. For example, the key image may be displayed larger when the key is stocked in the stock performance than when the character throws the key into the keyhole in the chance up performance (initial most enlarged state). This configuration allows the stock to have more impact when it is opened than when the key is stocked. Also, by making it more impactful, the player can be impressed that the performance is favorable, even if the performance that is the target of the chance up performance has a low expectation.

Next, we will explain a specific example of a chance-up effect that targets decorative symbols. Figures 8-16 to 8-18 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of a chance-up effect that targets decorative symbols. Note that in Figures 8-16 to 8-18, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-16(1), an outpost performance is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face off against each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-16(1), a performance display is executed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 moves as if circling the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (1), the movable body 32 is located in an initial position that covers a portion of the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5.

Note that the performance images related to the outpost performance (e.g., character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in Figure 8-16 (1) and onwards, but are omitted from the illustration for simplicity. In this example, the performance images related to the outpost performance have a lower display priority than performance images related to the chance-up performance (e.g., key images, keyhole images, mini-character images, etc.) and performance images related to the performance that is the target of the chance-up performance (e.g., title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and are displayed on a lower layer than those images.

Next, when the chance-up teasing performance (true) is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (2), a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13, which suggests that a keyhole will appear, is displayed in the center of the display area. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 stop moving around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10. In addition, an "!" is displayed next to the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 to indicate the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. In addition, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 displayed during the chance-up teasing effect is represented by a dotted line in this example as shown in Figure 8-16, but in reality it has a transparency that allows the performance images in lower layers (for example, performance images related to the outpost performance) to be visible, and is designed to not interfere with the content of the super reach (i.e. the outpost performance) as much as possible even while the chance-up teasing effect is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(3), a display starts in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-16(4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the decorative pattern display area that is the target of the chance-up display, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-16(5), a display is performed in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 reaches the center position (corresponding to the center decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R. At this time, a triangular mark indicating that the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is shrinking is displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. Also, a display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(6), the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette, and a glowing effect image is displayed around it. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 also become a silhouette, and a glowing effect image is displayed around it. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-16(5) to FIG. 8-16(6), when changing the pose of the mini character A, a silhouette image is first displayed, and then the mini character A image in the changed pose is displayed from the silhouette image. In this way, by switching images between silhouette images rather than using material data that causes the mini character to move and change its pose, the material data can be simplified and the man-hours and costs involved in production can be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (7), a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed near the center position (the position corresponding to the middle decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R. This type of effect display makes it clear that the chance up teasing effect being executed is a chance up teasing effect (true), and that the target of the chance up effect is a decorative pattern.

In this example, when executing a chance-up effect that targets a dialogue effect, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed approximately at the center of the dialogue image 030IWG20 as shown in FIG. 8-12 (5), while when executing a chance-up effect that targets a decorative pattern, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area from the center position (corresponding to the center decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R as shown in FIG. 8-16 (7). This configuration makes it possible to prevent the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 from being covered by the movable body 32 and becoming difficult to see, and allows the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 to be displayed appropriately according to the characteristics of the target effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(8), an effect is displayed in which character A, located at the front of the screen, throws a key into the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, located at the back of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), an effect is displayed in which the key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front of the screen toward the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 at the back. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), the key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed at a size larger than the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, and then, as shown in FIG. 8-17(10), it is displayed as if it is moving toward the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller to represent moving away).

Then, to display the effect of the key being inserted into the keyhole, a key image 30IWG12 and a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17 (11), and to display the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened), a key image 030IWG12 rotated in the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17 (12).

When the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13), character A and the text display "Pattern Rank Up" are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (14), while character A and the text display of "Pattern Rank Up" are still displayed, an effect is displayed in which the left decorative pattern begins to rotate in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and the right decorative pattern begins to rotate in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13) to (14), by displaying character A in close-up, the effect image related to the outpost effect is obscured, reducing the sense of incongruity caused by the chance-up effect being executed in the middle of the outpost effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (15), an image of Character A and Character B standing side by side is displayed near the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and a performance display is performed in which the rotating left and right decorative patterns move to a position superimposed on the image. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (16), a glowing effect image is displayed around the rotating left and right decorative patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (17), the glowing effect image around the left and right decorative patterns is erased, and the left and right decorative patterns change from the normal color (white) to gold and are displayed with the word "GOLD" written on them, and the left and right decorative patterns stop rotating.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (18), the gold right and left decorative patterns are displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and the remaining prelude effects are executed. Since all stocked keys have been used due to the chance-up effect targeting the decorative patterns being executed, the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and mini key image 030IWG10 are no longer displayed, but no special effects are executed to indicate that they will not be displayed. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the mini key image 030IWG10, which is no longer in use, from standing out.

In this example, regardless of where the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed (i.e., regardless of which effect is the target of the chance-up effect), at least a part of the chance-up teasing effect is executed in a common manner. Specifically, as shown in Figures 8-14 (2) to (5) and 8-16 (2) to (5), even if the effects that are the target of the chance-up effect are different, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is initially displayed in a close-up across the entire screen, and is then displayed in a common manner that is gradually reduced. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to whether the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed, i.e., whether the chance-up effect is executed, as well as which effect is the target of the chance-up effect.

In addition, in this example, regardless of the position where the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed in the chance-up effect (i.e., regardless of the type of effect being targeted), an image is displayed in a common display position to notify that the performance mode of the target effect will change. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display "Pending rank up" or "Pattern rank up" are displayed to notify that the performance mode will change. This configuration makes it easier to recognize that the performance mode of the target effect will change due to the chance-up effect.

In addition, in this example, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the presentation mode of the target presentation changes in the chance-up presentation. Specifically, as shown in Figures 8-15 (13) to (15) and Figures 8-17 (13) to 8-18 (17), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the active display or decorative pattern mode changes. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the change in presentation mode of the target presentation due to the chance-up presentation.

In this example, the effect images for at least some of the effects among the multiple types of effects that are the target of the chance-up effect have a higher display priority than the key image, even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. Specifically, the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the key image, even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. With this configuration, it is possible to ensure visibility for some effects in any situation. Furthermore, for effect images for the other effects (for example, images that are not information related to the progress of the game, such as dialogue displays or title displays), the display priority is set lower than that of the key image when the key image acts on the keyhole image, thereby realizing a realistic effect and enhancing the effect of the effect.

In this example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) and Fig. 8-17 (13), when executing the chance-up effect, it is possible to display notification images such as effect images and characters covering the effect image related to the outpost effect, and text displays such as "reserved rank up" and "pattern rank up". Then, it is possible to execute the chance-up effect by using a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect when the notification images are displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-17 (13) to Fig. 8-18 (17), a pattern in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes while the character or text display of "pattern rank up" remains), and a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the target effect at a time other than when the notification image is displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) to (15), a pattern in which the appearance of the active display changes after the effect image, character, or text display of "reserved rank up" is erased). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that the presentation mode of the target effect will change by displaying the notification image, and it is possible to execute the chance-up effect suitably by using a presentation pattern according to the target effect. In particular, with the former, the effect can be made more spectacular by seamlessly increasing the chance (i.e., changing the presentation mode of the target effect) while the notification image is displayed, and with the latter, the chance is increased (i.e., changing the presentation mode of the target effect) after the notification image is erased, preventing an increase in the amount of data related to effect control.

In addition, in this example, a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect when the notification image is displayed has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the target effect at a time other than when the notification image is displayed. Specifically, a chance-up effect in which the mode of the decorative pattern changes has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a chance-up effect in which the mode of the active display changes (see Figure 8-7). With this configuration, the expectation can be varied depending on the flashiness of the presentation pattern, increasing interest.

In this example, the notification image can identify which effect's presentation mode has changed, and an image different from the presentation image related to that effect is used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), the text display "Pending Rank Up" or "Pattern Rank Up" is displayed. Such a configuration makes it easy to recognize which effect's presentation mode has changed.

In this example, the notification image displayed during the execution of the chance-up effect is displayed in a manner that covers the effect image related to the super reach (outpost effect), but the effects that are the subject of the chance-up effect include those in which the effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which it is not covered, and the latter have a higher probability of winning than the former. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) and Fig. 8-17 (13), the notification image displays a character and the text display "Reserved rank up" or "Pattern rank up" along with an effect image that covers the effect image related to the outpost effect, and this notification image covers the active display AH but does not cover the decorative pattern. And the chance-up effect in which the state of the decorative pattern changes has a higher probability of winning than the chance-up effect in which the state of the active display changes (see Fig. 8-7). With this configuration, the expectation level can be made different depending on the flashiness of the chance-up effect, and interest can be increased.

In addition, in this example, the effects that are the subject of the chance-up effect include those in which the effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which it is not covered, with the latter being more likely to be executed at a later timing within one variable display period than the former. Specifically, chance-up effects in which the state of the decorative pattern changes are executed later than chance-up effects in which the state of the active display changes (see Figure 8-3). With this configuration, it is possible to execute chance-up effects according to the time when the player's expectations are highest.

In this example, the effects that are the target of the chance-up effect include those in which the effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which it is not covered. In the latter case, one notification image is switched to another and displayed. Specifically, when a chance-up effect that targets a decorative pattern is executed, an image of character A is displayed as shown in Figures 8-17 (13) to (14), and then an image of character A and character B standing side by side is displayed as shown in Figures 8-17 (15) to 8-18 (17). This configuration can enhance the effect of the chance-up effect, which has a high expectation.

Next, a specific example of the chance-up teasing effect (fake) will be described. Figure 8-19 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the chance-up teasing effect (fake). Note that in Figure 8-19, the transition of the effect screen takes place in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

Figure 8-19 (1) shows the state immediately after the prelude performance in the first half of the Super Reach has started and the chance-up performance targeting the active display has been executed. In this example, as shown in Figure 8-19 (1), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are redisplayed in their initial positions at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5 after the chance-up performance has been executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-19(2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5 so as to pass through the display position of the effect (e.g., title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern) that is the target of the chance-up effect. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8-19(1) and (2), before the dialogue effect starts, the effect display is performed such that the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move so as to pass through the display position (or the position where it is scheduled to be displayed) of the dialogue image 030IWG20. With this configuration, when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner, the player's expectations for the chance-up effect targeting the effect at the displayed position can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

In this example, the effects that are the target of the chance-up effect are displayed in various positions such as the top, bottom, and bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 move to pass through these positions. This configuration allows players to focus on the positions to which the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 move and whether the effect displayed at those positions is the target of the chance-up effect.

In this example, when executing one chance up effect targeting one effect and then executing another chance up effect targeting another effect, the first chance up effect is executed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed before the other chance up effect is executed (see FIG. 8-4). This configuration allows for an interval between the first chance up effect and the other chance up effect, making each stand out, and also ensures a period of time during which the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1) to (2).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 have a lower display priority than the effect images (e.g., active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern, etc.) related to the effects that may be the target of the chance-up effect, and are displayed on a lower layer than them. This configuration allows attention to be drawn to the effects that may be the target of the chance-up effect. Note that, without being limited to this configuration, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 may be displayed on a lower layer than the effect images (e.g., decorative pattern) related to some of the effects that may be the target of the chance-up effect, and displayed on a higher layer than the effect images (e.g., active display and dialogue display) related to the other effects when moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed during the execution of a super reach, and are displayed with a higher display priority than the performance images related to the super reach (for example, the character images related to the outpost performance), but when the chance-up performance is not being executed, they are displayed so as not to obstruct the visibility of at least the central part of the performance image related to the super reach. Specifically, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed so as to move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, rather than moving in the center of the display area, and are not displayed superimposed on the face part, etc., of the character image related to the outpost performance. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 from obstructing the super reach (outpost performance) while still displaying them.

Next, when the chance-up teasing performance (fake) is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (3), a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13, which suggests that a keyhole will appear, is displayed in the center of the display area. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 stop moving around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10. In addition, an "!" is displayed next to the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 to indicate the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (3), when the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 is displayed, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 move closer to the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-19 (2) and (3), the mini character A image 030IWC10 and the mini key image 030IWG10 move at a slow speed when the effect to be used has not been specified (or when the chance up teasing effect is not being executed), and at a high speed when it has been specified (or when the chance up teasing effect is being executed). This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the chance up teasing effect or the effect that is the target of the chance up effect.

Next, an effect display begins in which the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks, but as shown in FIG. 8-19 (4), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11) is not displayed and the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 is erased. At this time, a "?" is displayed next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and mini-character A image 030IWC10 to indicate that the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 has been erased. With this configuration, it becomes clear that the executed chance-up teasing effect is a chance-up teasing effect (fake).

When the chance up teasing performance (fake) ends, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed again in their initial positions at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5. In this example, they are displayed in the same initial position after the chance up performance is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1) and after the chance up teasing performance (fake) is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5). This configuration makes it easy to understand that the chance up teasing performance (fake) has ended, and expresses the meaning of starting afresh. Also, by displaying them again in their initial positions, it is possible to prevent the amount of data related to performance control from increasing.

In this example, the keyhole (suggestive) image 030IWG13 and the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 can only be displayed once in response to the same effect. For example, if a chance-up teasing effect (or chance-up teasing effect (false)), which teases whether or not a chance-up effect targeting the dialogue display will be executed, has been executed once, the chance-up teasing effect targeting the dialogue display will not be executed again even if the dialogue display is displayed thereafter. This configuration makes it easy to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

The mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 may be configured so that a portion of them extends outside the display area (i.e., a portion of them is not displayed) when they are moved along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. With this configuration, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 can be flexibly moved and displayed in accordance with the performance images related to other performances.

For example, when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, effects that are not subject to the chance-up effect may not be executed. With this configuration, attention can be drawn to the effects that are executed when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this example, since the chance up effect can be executed multiple times, it may be possible to make it possible to recognize the number of times it has been executed. For example, when the first chance up effect is executed, an effect image resembling a blue flame may be displayed at the end of the display area of the image display device 5, when the second chance up effect is executed, the effect image may change to green, and when the third chance up effect is executed, the effect image may change to red. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that a chance up has occurred even after the chance up effect has ended and the effect image has been erased.

Next, we will explain the keyhole (suggested) image and keyhole (real) image for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. Figure 8-20 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of keyhole (real) images for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, in this example, there are multiple types of effects that are the target of the chance-up effect, and the display size of the effect image for each effect is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-20 (1) and (3), the dialogue display has a smaller display size than the title display. In this example, the chance-up effect is executed in a manner in which a keyhole (real) image is displayed in the position where the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the display size of the keyhole (real) image is configured to differ depending on the effect that is the target.

For example, the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the dialogue image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. 8-20(3) has a smaller display size than the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the title image 030IWG21 shown in FIG. 8-20(1). This configuration allows the player to predict the effect that will be the target of the chance-up effect from the position where the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 is displayed, thereby increasing interest, and by displaying the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 at a display size appropriate for the effect that will be targeted, a natural effect can be achieved.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the keyhole image is materialized, the silhouette of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed at a common size regardless of the type of effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. Then, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a display size that corresponds to the type of effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to standardize the animation until the keyhole is materialized, and to prevent the amount of data related to effect control from increasing.

As explained above, this feature section 030IW discloses the gaming machine configurations shown in means 1 to means 29 below.

(Means 1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and includes a suggestion performance execution means that suggests that the machine is controlled to the favorable state and is capable of executing multiple types of suggestion performances that differ in degree of expectation depending on the performance mode (e.g., a performance that displays a title display in a predetermined mode, a performance that displays an active display in a predetermined mode, a dialogue performance that displays a dialogue display in a predetermined mode, a decorative pattern performance that displays a decorative pattern in a predetermined mode, etc.), and a special image display performance execution means that can display a special image (e.g., a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12), and by using the displayed special image, a suggestion performance that is being executed in one performance mode can be changed to a different performance mode. and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, a chance-up effect in which the display color of the active display is changed from a normal color (white) to blue) that changes the display mode to a performance mode with a higher expectation than the normal color (white). The special effect execution means displays a special corresponding image (for example, a keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11) when a suggestion effect is being executed, and executes a special effect in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image (for example, displays a keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH or a decorative pattern, and executes a chance-up effect in a manner in which the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11 and rotates. See Figs. 8-15(9) to (15), Figs. 8-17(9) to 8-18(17), etc.). With such a configuration, when a special effect using a special image is executed, it is possible to enhance the performance effect by providing a story related to the special image, and to increase interest.

(Means 2) The special response image is displayed in the approximate center of the performance image related to the suggested performance being executed (for example, see FIG. 8-12 (5) and FIG. 8-14 (7)). At the timing when the special response image is displayed, a special performance targeting a suggested performance other than the suggested performance corresponding to the special response image is not executed (for example, at the timing when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, a chance-up performance targeting the dialogue display is not executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand the suggested performance that is the target of the special performance, and to draw attention to the timing at which the special response image is displayed.

(Means 3) The special response image can be displayed only once in response to the same suggestive effect (for example, if a chance-up teasing effect (or chance-up teasing effect (false)) that teases whether or not a chance-up effect targeting the dialogue display will be executed has been executed once, the chance-up teasing effect targeting the dialogue display will not be executed again even if the dialogue display is displayed thereafter). Such a configuration makes it easy to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect.

(Means 4) When the presentation mode of the suggestive effect changes due to a special effect, the presentation mode after the change differs depending on the timing of the change (for example, the later the timing of the execution of the chance-up effect, the more likely it is that the presentation mode will change to one with a higher advantage. See Figures 8-3 and 8-8). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the special effect will be executed, and to prevent players who had high hopes for the timing of the change from being disappointed.

(Means 5) A display teasing effect execution means is provided that can execute a display teasing effect (e.g., a chance-up teasing effect) that teases whether or not a special corresponding image will be displayed, and the display teasing effect execution means can execute the display teasing effect in a common manner regardless of where the special corresponding image is displayed (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-14 (2) to (5) and Fig. 8-16 (2) to (5), even if the target effects are different, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is initially displayed in a close-up across the entire screen and then displayed in a common manner that is reduced). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not a special corresponding image will be displayed, i.e., whether or not a special effect will be executed, and to draw attention to which suggestion effect will be the target of the chance-up effect.

(Means 6) When a special image is used in a special effect, it is displayed at a larger display size than the special corresponding image, and then displayed so as to act on the special corresponding image while shrinking (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-15 (9) to (12) and Fig. 8-17 (9) to (12), the key image 030IWG12 is displayed moving from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 at the back, so it is initially displayed at a larger display size than the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, and then displayed so as to rotate while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller to represent moving away).) With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image acting on the special corresponding image, and the effect of the special effect can be enhanced.

(Means 7) The special effect execution means can execute a special effect multiple times, and can vary the execution time depending on the special effect being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), a chance-up effect that targets a decorative pattern has a longer execution time than a dialogue display or a chance-up effect that targets a dialogue display. With such a configuration, various special effects can be executed at an appropriate execution time, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

(Means 8) When the presentation mode is changed by a special effect, the suggestive effect takes a longer time to execute than when the presentation mode is not changed by the special effect (for example, as shown in Figures 8-4 (A) and (B), the presentation execution time T11 of a dialogue effect whose presentation mode is changed by a chance-up effect is longer than the presentation execution time T12 of a dialogue effect whose presentation mode is not changed by a chance-up effect). With such a configuration, when a special effect is executed, a period for executing the special effect and its corresponding suggestive effect can be secured.

(Means 9) The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a first suggestive performance (e.g., a performance that displays a title display) and a second suggestive performance (e.g., a performance that displays a dialogue display) that is smaller in display size than the first suggestive performance, and the special performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance in a manner in which a special corresponding image is displayed at a position where a performance image related to the suggestive performance is displayed when the suggestive performance is being executed (e.g., a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position where the title image 030IWG21 is displayed or where the dialogue image 030IWG20 is displayed), and When the target suggestive effect is the first suggestive effect, the special corresponding image is displayed in a first display size corresponding to the display size of the first suggestive effect, and when the target suggestive effect is the second suggestive effect, the special corresponding image is displayed in a second display size corresponding to the display size of the second suggestive effect, the second display size being smaller than the first display size (for example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the dialogue image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. 8-20(3) has a smaller display size than the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the title image 030IWG21 shown in FIG. 8-20(1)). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by allowing the player to predict the target suggestive effect from the position where the special corresponding image is displayed, and it is possible to create a natural effect by displaying the special corresponding image in a display size suitable for the target effect.

(Means 10) The suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing a specific suggestion performance (e.g., a performance that displays a dialogue display) in which a performance image is displayed at a first position, and a special suggestion performance (e.g., a performance that displays a decorative pattern) in which a performance image is displayed at a second position (e.g., a position closer to the top end of the display area of the image display device 5) that is closer to the edge of the display area of the display means than the first position, and when the specific suggestion performance is executed, the special performance execution means displays a special corresponding image at approximately the center position of the performance image displayed at the first position (e.g., the As shown in FIG. 8-16(7), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at approximately the center of the dialogue image 030IWG20, and when a special suggestion effect is executed, the special response image is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area of the display means from the center position of the effect image displayed in the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-16(7), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area from the center position (the position corresponding to the middle decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R). With such a configuration, the special response image can be displayed appropriately according to the characteristics of the target suggestion effect.

(Means 11) The special effects include notification effects that notify the player that the presentation mode of the target suggestive effect will change by displaying a special image in a common display position regardless of the position where the special corresponding image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display of "Pending rank up" or "Pattern rank up" are displayed). Such a configuration makes it easier to recognize that the presentation mode of the target suggestive effect will change due to the special effect.

(Means 12) The special response image is not displayed when the presentation mode of the target suggestive effect in the special effect changes (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) to (15) and Fig. 8-17 (13) to Fig. 8-18 (17), the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is not displayed when the active display or decorative pattern mode changes). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the change in presentation mode of the suggestive effect.

(Means 13) The special image display means displays the special image in a manner that moves so as to pass through the display position of the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect during the period before the special effect is executed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-12 (1) to (4) and Fig. 8-19 (1) to (2), during the period before the chance-up effect that targets the dialogue effect is executed, the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 move so as to pass through the position where the dialogue image related to the dialogue effect is displayed (or the position where it is scheduled to be displayed). With such a configuration, when the special image is displayed in a moving manner, the player's expectations for the execution of a special effect that targets the suggestive effect at the position where the special image is displayed can be increased, and interest can be improved.

(Means 14) When a special image is used, the special image display means moves and displays the special image to the display position of the target suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (5) and FIG. 8-16 (5), the mini character A image 030IWC10 and the mini key image 030IWG10 move to the display position of the active display AH that is the target of the chance-up effect or to the decorative pattern display area). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special effect and the target suggestive effect.

(Means 15) The special image has a lower display priority than the effect image related to the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14) and FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini character A image 030IWC10 and the mini key image 030IWG10 have a lower display priority than the title display, active display, dialogue display, and decorative pattern, and are displayed in a lower layer than those). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the suggestive effect.

(Means 16) The special effect execution means can execute one special effect targeted at one suggestion effect, and then execute another special effect targeted at another suggestion effect, and the other special effect is executed after the first special effect has been executed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect targeted at a different target is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed). With such a configuration, it is possible to set an interval between the one special effect and the other special effect to make them stand out, and also to ensure a period of time during which the special image is displayed in a moving manner.

(Means 17) The speed at which the special image moves is faster when the suggestive effect to be used is specified than when it is not specified (for example, as shown in Figures 8-19 (2) and (3), the mini character A image 030IWC10 and the mini key image 030IWG10 move at a slow speed when the effect to be used is not specified, and at a high speed when it is specified). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the suggestive effect to be used.

(Means 18) When the special image is displayed and moved, an additional image is added, and the additional image is also displayed and moved, and when a special effect is executed, the additional image operates (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (8), Fig. 8-16 (1) to (8), Fig. 8-19 (2), the mini character A image 030IWC10 is displayed and moved together with the mini key image 030IWG10, and when a chance-up effect is executed, the character A image 030IWC10 throws the key image 030IWG12 into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and to enhance the effect of the special effect.

(Means 19) The special image is displayed in a manner that moves around the additional image, and the movement stops when the special effect is executed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (6), Fig. 8-16 (1) to (6), and Fig. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 moves in a manner that moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10, and stops its movement when the chance-up effect is executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and to enhance the effect of the special effect.

(Means 20) The special image and additional image are displayed during the execution of a specific effect (e.g., a Super Reach) that suggests that the player will be controlled to an advantageous state, and are displayed with a higher display priority than the effect images related to the specific effect (e.g., as shown in Figures 8-12 (1) to (4), the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed with a higher display priority than the character images related to the outpost effect in the first half of the Super Reach), and are displayed so as not to obstruct the visibility of at least the central part of the effect image related to the specific effect when the specific effect is being executed but the special effect is not being executed (e.g., as shown in Figures 8-12 (1) to (4) and Figure 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed so as to move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than moving in the center of the display area, and are not displayed superimposed on the face part, etc., of the character image related to the outpost effect). This configuration makes it possible to display special images and additional images without interfering with specific effects.

(Means 21) A special suggestion effect execution means is provided that can execute a first special suggestion effect (for example, a chance up teasing effect (true)) that suggests that a special effect will be executed and that the special effect will be executed after the effect, and a second special suggestion effect (for example, a chance up teasing effect (false)) that suggests that a special effect will be executed and that the special effect will not be executed after the effect, and the special image is displayed again at the initial position after the second special suggestion effect is executed (for example, the special image is displayed at a common initial position after the chance up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1) and after the chance up teasing effect (false) is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5)). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand that the second special suggestion effect has ended, and it is possible to express the meaning of starting afresh. In addition, by displaying it again at the initial position, it is possible to prevent the amount of data related to the effect control from increasing.

(Means 22) The special effect execution means can execute a special effect multiple times, and when executing one special effect targeting one suggestion effect, does not execute other special effects targeting other suggestion effects (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect with a different target is executed after a predetermined period has elapsed). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special effect being executed.

(Means 23) The effect images (e.g., decorative patterns) related to at least some of the suggestive effects among the multiple types of suggestive effects have a higher display priority than the special images, even when the special images act on the special corresponding images (see, for example, FIG. 8-15 (9)). With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure visibility of some suggestive effects in any situation. In addition, for effect images related to other suggestive effects (e.g., images that are not information related to the progress of the game, such as dialogue or title displays), a lower display priority than the special images when the special images act on the special corresponding images can be used to realize realistic effects and enhance the presentation effect.

(Means 24) The special effect execution means can display a specific image when executing a special effect (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) and Fig. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display of "Pending Rank Up" or "Pattern Rank Up" are displayed together with an effect image covering the performance image related to the outpost performance), and can execute a special effect by a first performance pattern that changes the performance mode of the target suggestive effect when the specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-17 (13) to Fig. 8-18 (17), a pattern in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes while the character and "Pattern Rank Up" display remain), and a second performance pattern that changes the performance mode of the target suggestive effect at a time other than when the specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) to (15), a pattern in which the appearance of the active display changes after the character and "Pending Rank Up" display are erased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that the performance mode of the suggestive effect changes by displaying a specific image, and it is possible to execute a special effect suitably by a performance pattern according to the target suggestive effect.

(Means 25) When a special effect is executed by the first effect pattern, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when a special effect is executed by the second effect pattern (for example, a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the active display changes. See FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the expectation can be varied depending on the flashiness of the effect pattern, thereby increasing interest.

(Means 26) As the specific image, it is possible to identify which suggestive performance has changed in its presentation mode, and an image different from the presentation image related to the suggestive performance is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), the text display "Pending Rank Up" or "Pattern Rank Up" is displayed). With such a configuration, it is easy to recognize which suggestive performance has changed in its presentation mode.

(Means 27) The special effect is executed during the execution of a specific effect (e.g., a super reach) that suggests whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the specific image displayed during the execution of the special effect is displayed in a manner that covers the effect image related to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display of "Hold rank up" or "Pattern rank up" are displayed together with an effect image that covers the effect image related to the outpost effect), and the suggestive effect includes a suggestive effect that is covered by a specific image and a suggestive effect that is not covered by a specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), the active display AH is covered, while as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13), the decorative pattern is not covered), and the suggestive effect that is not covered by a specific image has a higher expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state than the suggestive effect that is covered by a specific image (for example, a chance up effect in which the state of the decorative pattern changes has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a chance up effect in which the state of the active display changes. See FIG. 8-7). This configuration allows the level of expectation to vary depending on the extravagance of the special performance, increasing interest.

(Means 28) The special effects of the first presentation pattern are more likely to be executed later in one variable display period than the special effects of the second presentation pattern (for example, a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes is executed later than a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the active display changes. See FIG. 8-3). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute special effects according to the period when the player's expectations are high.

(Means 29) When a special effect is being executed by the first effect pattern, one specific image is switched to another specific image for display (for example, after an image of character A is displayed as shown in Fig. 8-17 (13) to (14), an image of character A and character B standing side by side is displayed as shown in Fig. 8-17 (15) to Fig. 8-18 (17)). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of a highly anticipated special effect.

In addition, when preview effects such as suggestive effects or special effects are executed, an image is generated and displayed on a display means such as an LCD based on the data stored in the image storage means. The drawing of images and the specific control of images in multiple layers will be explained in detail.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
9 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 11). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 9, three locations at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are general winning openings 10 that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 11), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 9). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 9). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 11).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 11).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 10 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (if a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, the operation of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 11. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 12 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S902). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be satisfied by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S903; Yes), recovery processing (step S904) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S905). The recovery processing in step S904 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S903; No), an initialization process (step S906) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization process in step S906 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S903, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

If the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S907, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S905 are executed, making it possible to control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 is executed but the setting change state is not controlled, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S904 is executed but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 13. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 13 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it diagnoses an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 13. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 12.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 10 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 15 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 15 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 15 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 15(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that, when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 15(A).

As shown in FIG. 15(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 15(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 16, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value from 1020 to 1346 is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the previous setting value of 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a special probability state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the game excessively gambling-oriented. Furthermore, for the time-saving miss, which is assigned a common judgment value for each setting value, the setting is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss can be reduced.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 17 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 17 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 18, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S90175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S90174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, characteristic part 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) having a display area capable of displaying an image and capable of displaying game-related information related to the progress of the game in the display area (e.g., the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols having a smaller display area than the decorative symbols);
A storage means (e.g., a CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (e.g., a decorative pattern or a background image) to be displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
an image processing means (e.g., a display control unit 123 and an SDRAM 210) having a plurality of display layers (e.g., a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc., as shown in FIG. 19-5) in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 19-17 );
Equipped with
The storage means is capable of storing display position displacement information for displacing the display position of at least a part of the specific image in the display area from a first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (e.g., in the case of the feature portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (e.g., a portion in which data of an image for displacement is stored in the CGROM 205),
The image processing means is capable of generating a displaced specific image by displacing the specific image arranged on the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in Fig. 19-23, a portion for generating a displacement target image by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in a layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in a layer 3 image drawing area, and applying a displacement image to the displacement target image to generate an image in which the images in the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R are moved upward and the image in the middle area 006SG005C is moved downward as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 during a development suggestion performance).
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the characteristic portion 006SG, a reach suggestion effect in the modified example 006SG-1, a revival effect in the modified example 006SG-2, a foresight notice effect in the modified example 006SG-3, a promotion effect in the modified example 006SG-5, a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect in the modified example 006SG-6) that displays the displaced specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a specific performance can be executed by displacing the display position of a specific image from a first position to a second position simply by using image data for displaying a specific image in the display area and display position displacement information for displacing the display position of the specific image. Therefore, the amount of data to be stored in the memory means for executing a specific performance can be reduced compared to when a specific performance is executed using dedicated image data.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged on a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area rather than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a specific effect is being executed, the display position of the game-related information does not shift along with at least a portion of the specific image, thereby preventing the game-related information from becoming difficult for the player to see when the specific effect is being executed.

A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect,
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area overlapping with the displacement specific image (for example, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping with the image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion performance),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position to become a displaced specific image, the game-related information is not displaced but is displayed overlapping the displaced specific image, so that the player can recognize the game-related information without feeling uncomfortable.

A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect,
At least a part of the game-related information is displayed in an area of the display area that does not overlap with the displacement specific image (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed in the lower part of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R during the development suggestion performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even when the specific image is displaced to the second position to become a displaced specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed so as not to overlap with the displaced specific image, so that the player can accurately recognize the game-related information.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the second to fourth aspects,
The game device includes a game identifier variable display executing means (for example, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 11) capable of executing variable display of game identifiers (for example, special symbols),
The performance execution means includes:
In a first region within the display region, a variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the game identification information can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-21, in a central portion of the display region of the image display device 5, a portion in which a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of a special pattern can be executed);
In a second area in the display area that is different from the first area and smaller than the first area, a variable display of reduced identification information corresponding to the variable display of the gaming identification information can be executed (for example, as shown in Figs. 19-21, in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, a portion in which a variable display of a small symbol corresponding to the variable display of a special symbol can be executed);
The display image of the performance identification information is arranged on the specific display layer, and the visibility state changes from a first visibility state to a second visibility state which is more difficult for the player to see than the first visibility state in response to the execution of the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figures 19-21 and 19-23, the decorative symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when a development suggestion performance is executed, the decorative symbols move upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, thereby reducing visibility).
The display image of the reduced identification information is arranged on the special display layer, and the visibility state does not change from the first visibility state in response to the execution of the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 19-21 and 19-23, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative symbols, when the development suggestion performance is executed, the small symbols do not move from the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, and therefore the visibility does not decrease).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the visual effect of a specific effect can be improved by changing the visual state of the effect identification information from a first visual state to a second visual state when a specific effect is executed, and since the visual state of the reduced identification information does not change from the first visual state when a specific effect is executed, a player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually checking the reduced identification information even while a specific effect is being executed.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
The display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T shown in FIG. 19-31) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B shown in FIG. 19-31),
The performance execution means includes:
In the specific performance, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-31(C), a portion that displays a decorative pattern and a background image across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-31(D), a portion in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move in the left and right directions).
When the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced, an effect image (for example, a cutting effect image 006SG005S shown in FIG. 19-31) different from the images displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area is displayed at the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the displacement of the specific image to the second position as a special effect can be more effectively recognized by the player, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a seventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect,
The performance execution means is capable of displacing the first specific display area in a first direction and displacing the second specific display area in a second direction opposite to the first direction, as a displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-31(D), a portion that moves the upper area 006SG005T to the right and the lower area 006SG005B to the left, and as shown in FIG. 19-31(E), a portion that moves the upper area 006SG005T upward and the lower area 006SG005B downward).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the displacement of the specific image to the second position as a specific performance can be executed as a displacement of the first specific display area in a first direction and a displacement of the second specific display area in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction, thereby further improving the effect of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine of aspect 6 or aspect 7,
The displacement amount of the first specific display area and the displacement amount of the second specific display area in the specific performance are different (for example, as shown in modified example 006SG-3, when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a pre-reading preview performance, the movement amount (displacement amount) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are different).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can further improve the presentation effect of specific presentations.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the sixth to eighth aspects,
The effect image is arranged in a special display layer in which the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area rather than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than a decorative pattern or a background image).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the display position of a specific image is displaced as a specific performance, the display position of the effect image is not displaced. Therefore, by contrasting the specific image with the effect image, the displacement of the display position of the specific image can be made more prominent, thereby further improving the performance effect of the specific performance.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the sixth to ninth aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying the effect image in a plurality of display modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-30, a portion capable of displaying the crack effect image 006SG005H in two colors, blue and red, and as shown in FIG. 19-33, a portion capable of displaying the cutting effect image 006SG005S in three colors, blue, green, and red);
The proportion of the advantageous state controlled varies depending on the display mode in which the effect image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-30, a portion in which the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the color in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 19-33, a portion in which the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the color in which the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the effect image displayed during the special presentation, thereby further improving the presentation effect of the special presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 10,
The specific effect is an effect in which the specific image changes gradually (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-21, in the development suggestion effect of the characteristic part 006SG, a part in which the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R increases gradually, as shown in FIG. 19-27, in the revival effect of the modified example 006SG-2, the decorative pattern in the center gradually expands and the amount of movement of the fragments that make up the decorative pattern gradually increases, as shown in FIG. 19-35, in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5, a part in which the distortion of the decorative pattern and the background image gradually increases).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the specific image changes in stages, thereby improving the presentation effect of the specific presentation.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eleventh aspect,
The specific effect is an effect in which the display position of the specific image is gradually displaced from the first position to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-21, in the development suggestion effect of the characteristic part 006SG, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R gradually moves upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 19-27, in the revival effect of the modified example 006SG-2, the fragments constituting the decorative pattern in the middle gradually move from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the periphery of the display area, as well as the portion in the promotion effect of the modified example 006SG-5 where the decorative pattern and the background image are gradually distorted toward the left side).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the displacement of a specific image from a first position to a second position in a specific presentation can be emphasized, thereby further increasing the interest of the presentation.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eleventh aspect,
The specific image is composed of a plurality of image fragments (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-28, a portion in which a decorative pattern is composed of a plurality of fragments),
The specific performance is a performance in which the number of the displayed image pieces increases stepwise (for example, as shown in variant example 006SG-2, a part in which the number of pieces constituting the decorative pattern in the middle increases stepwise as the revival performance progresses).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the visual effect of the image pieces gradually increasing can leave a strong impression on the player of the specific presentation.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the eleventh aspect,
The specific performance is a performance in which the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the display area increases stepwise (for example, in the case of the hot water shown in FIG. 1-28, the ratio of the display area of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5 increases stepwise in the revival performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the ratio of the area in which the specific image is displayed to the total display area increases stepwise, so that the player's attention can be more effectively drawn to the specific effects.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the eleventh to fourteenth aspects,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
The storage means is capable of storing a plurality of pieces of display position displacement information having different displacement modes of the specific image (for example, a portion in which a plurality of pieces of image data for displacement are stored in the CGROM 206);
The proportion of the specific image controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the display position displacement information the specific image is displaced based on (for example, in a variable display in a super reach variation pattern, displacement image data for sliding and moving the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R up to the third stage is used, whereas in a variable display in a normal reach variation pattern, displacement image data for sliding and moving the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R up to the first or second stage is used, so that the proportion of the specific image controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the manner in which the specific image changes during the specific presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the specific presentation.

A gaming machine according to a sixteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the eleventh to fifteenth aspects,
The plurality of pieces of display position displacement information include first display position change information in which the specific image changes from a first state to a second state different from the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-21, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach, displacement image data for sliding the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R to the third stage), and second display position change information in which the specific image does not change from the first state to the second state (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-22, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a normal reach, displacement image data for sliding the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R to the first or second stage).
The first display position change information and the second display position change information have a common change part for changing the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect by the image processing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-21 and FIG. 19-22, in a case where displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid and moved up to the third stage is used, and in a case where displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R are slid and moved up to the first stage is used, the difference between ... The portions where the images in the left region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common between the case where displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage is used and the case where displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C and the right region 006SG005R slide to the second stage is used,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the process in which the specific image changes from the first state to the second state as a specific effect, thereby further increasing the interest in the specific effect.

A gaming machine according to a seventeenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixteenth aspects,
the display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The performance execution means includes:
In the specific performance, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-31(C), a portion that displays a decorative pattern and a background image across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-31(D), a portion in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move in the left and right directions).
After the displaced specific image is displayed, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can be displaced (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-31(D) and FIG. 19-31(E), after the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left, the boundary between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is further moved upward and downward, respectively).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, after the displaced specific image is displayed, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is further displaced, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the specific presentation and increasing interest in the presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect 18 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17,
The boundary between the first specific display region and the second specific display region is displaceable in a direction different from that of at least one of the multiple display regions including the first specific display region and the second specific display region (for example, as shown in Figures 19-31 (D) and 19-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves toward the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves toward the left, but the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the specific presentation can be further enhanced by the synergistic effect of the displacement of the multiple display areas and the displacement of the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area.

A gaming machine according to a nineteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighteenth aspects,
At least in the specific display layer, images can be arranged across an area corresponding to the display area and outside the area corresponding to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-39, when performing a promotion performance, a decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, and a part of the background image is arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a displaced specific image is displayed in the display area as a specific effect, the risk of an inappropriate display being performed in the display area can be reduced.
In addition, in variant example 006SG-5 of the present invention, when executing a promotion performance (specific performance), an example is given of a form in which an image for a promotion performance is created by applying a displacement image to the entire image to be displaced that has been enlarged so that its left and right width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the image to be displaced to which the displacement image is applied is limited to only the part that corresponds to the display area of the image display device 5, in other words, it is not necessary to displace the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

A gaming machine according to a 20th aspect is the gaming machine according to a 19th aspect,
The effect execution means is capable of enlarging the image displayed in the display area during a period in which the specific image is displaced from the first position to the second position as the specific effect (for example, a part that gradually enlarges a decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area according to the progress of the promotion effect).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display in the display area during the process leading up to the display of the displaced specific image, while maintaining the effect of the specific presentation.

A gaming machine of aspect 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 20,
the display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific performance, and displaying an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, with the upper area 006SG005T moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moving to the left).
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are different (for example, as shown in modified example 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special effects can be performed without giving the player a sense of incongruity, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 22 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 20,
the display area includes a first specific display area (e.g., an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area (e.g., a lower area 006SG005B) different from the first specific display area,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific performance, and displaying an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced as the displaced specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, with the upper area 006SG005T moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moving to the left).
When the displaced specific image is displayed in the display area, at least a part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are the same (for example, as shown in modified example 006SG-3, at least a part of the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after being moved to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after being moved to the left are in common).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to add an element of surprise to the specific presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine of aspect 23 is the gaming machine according to aspect 21 or 22,
A part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the specific image is displayed is not displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the displaced specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in variant example 006SG-3, a part of the image displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is not displayed as an image displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left as a pre-reading preview performance).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can further increase the interest in the specific presentation.

A gaming machine of aspect 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 23,
The display means is capable of displaying a stereoscopic image composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-44, a portion in which a naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5′ is capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) composed of a right-eye image (R image) and a left-eye image (L image));
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect that displays the stereoscopic image (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-45(B), a portion in which a variable display preview effect can be displayed in a stereoscopic image),
When the specific performance is executed, a non-stereoscopic image is displayed as the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-45(D), when a development suggestion performance is executed, an image displayed as the development suggestion performance is displayed as a planar image).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the stereoscopic presentation can increase the player's interest, and since a displaced specific image is not displayed as a stereoscopic image in the specific presentation, the specific presentation can be implemented in an optimal manner.

A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine according to aspect 24,
the right-eye image and the left-eye image are arranged on a stereoscopic display layer in which arranged images are preferentially displayed in the display area over the specific display layer;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a specific performance is executed, a stereoscopic performance can be executed suitably.

A gaming machine of aspect 26 is the gaming machine of aspect 24 or aspect 25,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the stereoscopic performance as an introduction performance of the specific performance during a period prior to the execution period of the specific performance during variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution of the stereoscopic effect allows the player to be aware in advance that a specific effect will be executed, thereby further improving the effect of the specific effect.

As shown in FIG. 19-1, the performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, and the like. In the performance control board 12, the performance control CPU 120 operates according to a program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives performance control commands via the input circuit 260. Based on the performance control commands, the performance control CPU 120 also performs processing to cause the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 to perform display control of the image display device 5, such as generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 19-1, the display control unit 123 constitutes a display control circuit together with a CGROM 205 in which data such as characters (image data of people, animals, letters, figures, symbols, etc., also called CG data) and decorative patterns, background images, a first interface image 006SG005I and a second interface image 006SG005J including small patterns for displaying a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D that identifiably displays the number of reserved first special patterns as game-related information in this feature unit 006SG, and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U that identifiably displays the number of reserved second special patterns, and an SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area are stored.

The performance control CPU 120 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to read out the necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which the image data is stored according to the received performance control command. The CGROM 205 is a ROM for storing in advance the character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, the image data of people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative designs), and background images. Note that the CGROM 205 in this characteristic unit 006SG also stores a plurality of displacement image data for displacing the positions of the pixels constituting the displacement target image to other positions by applying the data to the displacement target image described later. The display control unit 123 reads out the image data from the CGROM 205 according to the command of the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 then executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 is an integrated circuit equipped with a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, an attribute register 203 in which attributes (parameters used when drawing characters, data specifying the character drawing order, number of colors, zoom ratio, palette number, coordinates, etc.) are stored, a drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of images in a drawing area of the VRAM area described later, a data transfer control unit 211 that controls the transfer of CG data stored in the CGROM 205 to the VRAM area, a display control unit 213 that outputs video signals (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) and synchronization signals for displaying image data stored in a display image creation area of the VRAM area described later, and a DA converter 214 that converts the video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal and outputs it to the image display device 5.

The display control unit 123 includes a system bus and a CG bus, which are connected to the performance control CPU 120 via a CPU interface 201, and to an image processing DSP 264 to which an infrared camera 60 is connected. The CG bus is further connected to a CGROM 205 via a CG bus interface 204. A system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and an attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, allowing the performance control CPU 120 to access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

The drawing control unit 206, data transfer control unit 211, and display control unit 213 are also connected to the system bus, and are able to access the system register 202. The drawing control unit 206 and data transfer control unit 211 are also connected to the CG bus, and are able to access the CG ROM 205 and attribute register 203.

A VRAM bus is also provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via a VRAM bus interface 209. The drawing control unit 206, the data transfer control unit 211, and the display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus, and the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

The system registers 202 include a system control register that stores commands for initial settings, drawing, data transfer, etc., an interrupt control register that stores commands for outputting interrupt signals (described later), a drawing register that stores the drawing area in the VRAM area and the area where palette data is placed, a data transfer register that stores the source address and destination address when transferring data, and a display register that stores the display image creation area in the VRAM area.

The CPU interface 201 outputs a V-blank interrupt signal to the performance control CPU 120 at the start of each V-blank (image update period), and also outputs various other interrupt signals to the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this characteristic part 006SG, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and in the next V blank, it is switched to the display image creation area, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

In particular, as shown in Figures 19-2(a) and 19-2(b), this characteristic section 006SG generates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers. The VRAM area includes a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area (see Figure 19-5). Note that each layer has the concept of upper, middle, and lower, and the higher the layer image, the higher the display priority is set on the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image, the lower the display priority is set on the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 19-5 (A) and 19-5 (B), the VRAM area contains a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of layer 1, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of layer 2, and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of layer 3. The VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images, which will be described later, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is an area where an image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (composite) to create a displacement target image, and where a displacement image (described later) is applied to the displacement target image to create a displacement image.

The display image creation area is an area in which an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, or an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area, is created as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

The image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is set to the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) on the image display device 5, the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to the image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to the image with the lowest display priority (display priority: low) on the image display device 5.

In other words, Layer 1 is the top layer with the highest image display priority, Layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than Layer 1, and Layer 3 is the bottom layer with the lowest image display priority.

As shown in Figures 19-2 (b) and 19-5 (B), the layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing these images to display a first interface image 006SG005I including a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D that identifiably displays the first reserved memory number of special patterns and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U that identifiably displays the second reserved memory number of special patterns at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and a second interface image 006SG005J that includes a small pattern that is smaller in display area than the decorative pattern at the top right of the display area of the image display device 5.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 where the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background image is drawn to display the background image across the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this characteristic part 006SG, it is possible to generate an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by superimposing the image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), the image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and the image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area (layer 3 image). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) are displayed as the topmost image in the image display device 5 because they have the highest display priority, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area (decorative design) is displayed as the middle image in the image display device 5 because it has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (background image) is displayed as the lowest image in the image display device 5 because it has the lowest display priority.

In this characteristic section 006SG, the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area are set to a transparency of 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently in the display area of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

Next, we will explain the method of displacing the image to be displaced in this characteristic part 006SG. As shown in Figure 19-3 (A), the image for displacement to be applied to the image to be displaced has multiple pixels having red component values (R values) and green component values (G values) arranged therein. These R values and G values each have a value in the range of 1 to 256.

Taking pixel A as an example, the display control unit 123 identifies the position of pixel X to be displaced from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image based on the R and G values of pixel A. Specifically, if the R value of pixel A is between 1 and 127, the display control unit 123 identifies the position moved from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image in the negative direction (leftward) of the X axis as the coordinate (position) of pixel X in the X axis direction, and if the R value of pixel A is between 129 and 256, the display control unit 123 identifies the position moved from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image in the positive direction (rightward) of the X axis as the coordinate of pixel X in the X axis direction. The amount of movement in the X axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is the difference from 128, which is the median R value.

If the G value of pixel A is between 1 and 127, the position moved in the negative direction (downward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is identified as the Y coordinate of pixel X, and if the G value of pixel A is between 129 and 256, the position moved in the positive direction (upward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is identified as the Y coordinate (position) of pixel X. Note that the amount of movement in the Y axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the image to be displaced is the difference from 128, which is the median G value.

Then, once the position of pixel X in the displacement target image has been identified, pixel X is designated as the pixel to be displayed at a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image. That is, pixel X is displaced to a position corresponding to pixel A. In other words, in this feature part 006SG, by individually adjusting the R value and G value of pixel A, it is possible to displace any pixel X to a position corresponding to pixel A, and by adjusting the R value and G value of pixel A to the same value, it is also possible to displace a specific pixel X that is the same distance away from the position corresponding to pixel A to a position corresponding to pixel A.

The display control unit 123 executes the above process for multiple pixels. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-3 (B), the displacement image is composed of multiple regions (displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, displacement image d) with different R and G values, and each region is applied to the displacement target image to generate a displacement image.

For example, as shown in Fig. 19-4(A) to Fig. 19-4(C), the following regions are provided that make up the displacement image: displacement image a with an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 1 to 127; displacement image b with an R value of 128 and a G value of any one of 129 to 256; displacement image c with an R value of any one of 1 to 127 and a G value of 128; and displacement image d with an R value of any one of 129 to 256 and a G value of 128. The image of the triple circle is the image to be displaced.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 19-4(D), for displacement image a, the range in the displacement target image that is moved downward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position in displacement image a is specified as the display range in the displacement image. Also, as shown in FIG. 19-4(E), for displacement image b, the range in the displacement target image that is moved upward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position in displacement image b is specified as the display range in the displacement image. Also, as shown in FIG. 19-4(F), for displacement image c, the range in the displacement target image that is moved left by the difference in R value from the corresponding position in displacement image c is specified as the display range in the displacement image. Also, as shown in FIG. 19-4(G), for displacement image d, the range in the displacement target image that is moved right by the difference in R value from the corresponding position in displacement image d is specified as the display range in the displacement image.

As described above, by displacing the specified range from the image to be displaced to the positions of displacement images a, b, c, and d using the R and G values of displacement images a, b, c, and d, a displacement image such as that shown in Figure 19-4 (H) is generated.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, the boundaries between displacement images a, b, c, and d are clearly defined by setting either the R value or the G value of each of displacement images a, b, c, and d to a fixed value, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to generate a gradation-like image as a displacement image by gradually varying the R value and G value of the pixels near each boundary between displacement images a, b, c, and d.

Figure 19-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature section 006SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 19-6 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 19-6(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the result of the determination of which of several types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot", as shown in FIG. 19-6 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19-6 (B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening big win state and the high-speed opening big win state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 19-6(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls having entered each winning slot, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 19-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 19-7, in this feature section 006SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 19-8 shows an example of the configuration of a special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 006SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature section 006SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 006SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in a probability variable state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 006SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 006SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 19-9 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature unit 006SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 006SG will be explained using FIG. 19-9 (B). In this feature section 006SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of a jackpot game state of a special jackpot A to a special jackpot C will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the special jackpots A to C, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states occur consecutively without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 006SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-9(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" to control to a jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-9(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 19-10 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 006SG. In this feature section 006SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that, in this feature section 006SG, one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this feature section 006SG, two types of fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of super reach fluctuation patterns or only one type may be provided.

The Super Reach fluctuation patterns in this feature part 006SG include Super Reach α fluctuation patterns in which the variable display results in a jackpot (PB1-2) and a miss (PA2-2), and Super Reach β fluctuation patterns in which the variable display results in a jackpot (PB1-3) and a miss (PA2-3).

As shown in Figure 19-10, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature part 006SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing. Therefore, in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In particular, the special chart change time of the Super Reach β change pattern is set to be longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach α change pattern. In other words, the Super Reach β change pattern is set to have a higher chance of the variable display result becoming a "jackpot" than the Super Reach α change pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

The normal reach variation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and super reach variation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) in this feature section 006 are also variation patterns that execute a development suggestion effect to a super reach reach effect after a reach is established during the variable display. In the normal reach variation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1), the variable display result is displayed after the development suggestion effect is executed without developing into a super reach reach effect, while in the super reach variation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), the super reach reach effect is executed after the development suggestion effect is executed.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, the normal reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach fluctuation patterns (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) are exemplified as examples of a form in which a development suggestion effect to a super reach reach effect is executed after a reach is established during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and between the normal reach fluctuation patterns and the super reach fluctuation patterns, a fluctuation pattern in which a development suggestion effect is not executed may be set.In addition, when a development suggestion effect is executed, the rate of development to a super reach reach effect may be set higher than when a development suggestion effect is not executed.

Figure 19-11 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature part 006SG. In this feature part 006SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-11, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table.

Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 35%, and PB1-3 at a rate of 60%.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Multiple jackpot variation pattern determination tables with different determination rates for any of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 may be provided, and the variation pattern may be determined using different jackpot variation pattern determination tables depending on the type of jackpot. In this way, a variation pattern that is easily determined for each type of jackpot can be created, so that the player can pay attention to which variation pattern's variable display has resulted in the variable display result being a jackpot, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%; PA2-1 at a rate of 40%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%; PA2-1 at a rate of 30%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%; PA2-1 at a rate of 20%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D, PA1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%; PA2-1 at a rate of 20%; PA2-2 at a rate of 7%; and PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 006SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable chart being 3 or 4, or on the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 006SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special chart reserve memory section, a second special chart reserve memory section, a regular chart reserve memory section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the type of big win, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates the reserved number with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reserved data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 19-1 has, for example, a performance control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area shown in Figure 19-15 (A) has a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The performance control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to performance operation states, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 006SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer is stored in a specified area of the performance control buffer setting section. The start winning time receiving command buffer has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed. The start winning time receiving command buffer also has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Figure 19-12 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 14 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 19-12, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 006SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 006SGS144), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 006SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the special pattern display result judgment table shown in FIG. 19-8 is selected and set as a table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006SGS150a). In addition, in this step 006SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability is low and the probability flag is off, if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected in step 006SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 006SGS150a, whether or not to set the special chart display result as a "jackpot" is determined using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state, so that when the game state is a high probability state, it is judged (determined) as a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; Y), the game control flag setting unit sets the jackpot flag to ON (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-9 (A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot types the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 006SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a high probability state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot" corresponding to a non-high probability jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is a "high probability A" corresponding to a high probability jackpot A, it can be set to "1", if it is a "high probability B" corresponding to a high probability jackpot B, it can be set to "2", and if it is a "high probability C" corresponding to a high probability jackpot C, it can be set to "3".

After step 006SGS155 is completed, or if it is determined in step 006SGS150a that the game is not a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; N), a fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set to the on state) and the determined jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if it is determined in step 006SGS150a that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot," if the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "high probability jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot," a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C," a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are merely examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 006SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 19-13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 14 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 19-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set to the ON state (step 006SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is set to the ON state (step 006SGS161; Y), the CPU 103 selects and sets the fluctuation pattern determination table for the jackpot (step 006SGS164).

If the judgment in step 006SGS161 indicates that the jackpot flag is not set to the ON state (step 006SGS161; N), the game control flag setting unit judges whether the time-saving flag is set to the ON state to judge whether the game state is in a special state or a time-saving state and time-saving control is being performed (step 006SGS168). Then, if the time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 006SGS168; Y), the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns (step 006SGS169).

On the other hand, when time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not on (step 006SGS168; N), the number of reserved memories of variable special charts is identified, for example by reading the stored value of a reserved memory number counter for variable special charts provided in the game control counter setting unit, and it is determined whether the identified reserved memory number of variable special charts is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), the loss variable pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 006SGS171).

In addition, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 3 (step 006SGS172).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 3 (step 006SGS172; Y), the loss variable pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 006SGS173).

Also, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 4 (step 006SGS172; N), the program selects and sets the miss variable pattern determination table C as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable pattern (step 006SGS174), and proceeds to step 006SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 006SGS164, step 006SGS169, step 006SGS171, step 006SGS173, and step 006SGS174, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special win fluctuation pattern determination table, or miss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in a fluctuation random number buffer (step 006SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, step 006SGS175 determines the variation pattern, and determines whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to "reach." In other words, step 006SGS170 includes a process for determining whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to a "reach" state when the variable display result is a "miss."

After the variation pattern is determined in step 006SGS175, settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that either a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 006SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 006SGS176, settings are made to send various commands for when the special pattern starts to change (step 006SGS177). For example, when the special pattern change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sequentially sends the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable display start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the processing of step 006SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 006SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result). After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation processing (step 006SGS179), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS177, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 13 is executed after the variable pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

Figure 19-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 14 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S112 to end the change of the special symbol, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to display the stopped symbol (step 006SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the CPU 103 controls to send a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to turn them off (step 006SGS184) if they are turned on, and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-probability variable jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 006SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display timer is set to a value equivalent to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 006SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 006SGS189), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving counter value is "0." If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step 006SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 006SGS190; N), that is, if the time-saving count is remaining and the game is in a high base state, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 006SGS193). If it is not "0" (step 006SGS193; N), the program proceeds to step 006SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS193; Y), the program clears the time-saving flag to turn it off in order to end the time-saving control (step 006SGS194), sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability low base state) corresponding to the state of the probability flag or the time-saving flag (step 006SGS195), and then proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern, and then the special pattern stop processing is terminated.

Figure 19-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 14 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 006SGS202), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the variable jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS207), the time-saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS208), the time-saving counter is set to "0" (step 006SGS209), and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), steps 006SGS211 and 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is sent according to the type of jackpot (step 006SGS214). Then, after sending a game state command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability flag and time-saving flag (step 006SGS215), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of special patterns (step 006SGS216).

Next, the operation of the performance control CPU 120 will be described. Figure 19-16 is a part of the flowchart of the performance control process shown in Figure 18. In the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 executes the above-mentioned advance notice setting process (step S161), then executes a background image change process (step 006SG162) to change the background image displayed on the image display device 5, and executes one of the processes from step S170 to step S175.

As a background image change process, for example, the performance control CPU 120 decides to change the background image displayed on the image display device 5 at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%) at the start of the variable display (the timing at which the performance control process process is executed with the performance control process flag value set to 1), and starts displaying a new background image on the image display device 5 in response to this decision. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, when any of a number of background images is displayed on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is variable displayed and a performance corresponding to the variable display is executed.

In addition, in the background image change process, when the game state changes (for example, when the game state changes from the normal state to the jackpot game state, from the jackpot game state to the special state or the time-saving state, or from the special state or the time-saving state to the jackpot state or the normal state), the presentation control CPU 120 may be able to display a background image corresponding to the new game state on the image display device 5.

Figure 19-17 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the variable display during performance processing of the performance control process. In the variable display during performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 decrements by 1 the values of the process timer corresponding to the process table selected by the performance control CPU 120 in accordance with the fluctuation pattern in the variable display start setting processing, the variable display time timer set by the performance control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting processing, and the variable display control timer (step 006SGS901, step 006SGS902, step 006SGS903).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the process timer has timed out (step 006SGS906). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 006SGS907). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 006SGS908). In addition, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is changed based on the contents of the next process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 006SGS909). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 006SGS910).

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921; Y), the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to create image data for the next display screen for the left, center, and right decorative patterns (screens that should be displayed 30 ms after the previous display switch of the decorative patterns) (step 006SGS922). The performance control CPU 120 also determines whether the variable display is a variable display of a normal reach or super reach variable pattern (step 066SGS923).

If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern (step 066SGS923; N), proceed to step 006SGS927. If the variable display is a normal reach or super reach variable display (step 006SGS923; Y), it is further determined whether the display image processing flag described below is on (step 006SGS924).

If the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS924; Y), proceed to step 006SGS926. If the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS924; N), the process checks the contents of the process data being executed to determine whether it is the timing to start suggesting the development of the Super Reach to a Reach performance (step 006SGS925). If it is not the timing to start suggesting the development of the Super Reach to a Reach performance (step 006SGS925; N), proceed to step 006SGS927. If it is the timing to start suggesting the development of the Super Reach to a Reach performance (step 006SGS925; Y), proceed to step 006SGS926.

In step 006SGS926, the performance control CPU 120 executes a display image processing process to process (displace) a portion of the image to be displayed on the image display device 5, and then proceeds to step 006SGS927.

In step 006SGS927, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to execute a process of synthesizing (superimposing) the images created in the above-mentioned steps 006SGS922 and 006SGS921 in the display image creation area of the VRAM 209. Then, the variable display control timer is reset (step 006SGS928). In this way, variable display control of the decorative pattern is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on an image in which an image such as the set background image is superimposed on an image based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the background image, character image, decorative pattern, etc. in the changing decorative pattern are displayed in the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 19-19, the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 006SG is a part of the background image, the first interface image 006SG005I, the second interface image 006SG005J, and a decorative pattern, the positions of which have been adjusted in advance so as to be displayed in the display area. In particular, the background image in this characteristic part 006SG is drawn as an image longer in the left-right width direction and the up-down width direction than the display area of the image display device 5, and the display area of the image display device 5 is configured to display the center part of the background image in the left-right width direction. In other words, in this characteristic part 006SG, at least the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area for drawing and arranging the background image are areas for drawing and arranging an image that is longer in the up-down width direction and the left-right width direction than the display area of the image display device 5, and the display area of the image display device 5 displays only the part of the image that corresponds to the display area.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, an example is shown in which the layer 3 image drawing area, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area are areas for drawing and arranging images whose vertical and horizontal width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. The layer 3 image drawing area and the displacement image creation area may be areas for drawing and arranging images whose vertical and horizontal width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5, while the display image creation area may be an image for drawing and arranging images whose vertical and horizontal width dimensions are the same as the display area of the image display device 5. In this case, the background image can be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 by arranging only the parts of the image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area or the displacement image creation area that correspond to the display area of the image display device 5 in the display image creation area.

The performance control CPU 120 also checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 006SGS929). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that a pattern confirmation command has been received is on (step 006SGS930; Y), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern confirmation command is received, the control shifts to one that stops the fluctuation. Therefore, even if a fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards or the like is received, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special pattern ends).

Figure 19-18 is a flow chart showing the display image processing (step 006SGS926) during the variable display performance processing shown in Figure 19-17. In the display image processing, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the display image processing flag is on or not (step 006SGS941). If the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS941; N), it determines whether the variable display being executed is a variable display due to a Super Reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS942). If the variable display being executed is a variable display due to a Super Reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS942; Y), it selects the displacement image data for successful development to the Super Reach performance (for announcing the execution of the Super Reach performance) and proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS943).

The displacement image data in this characteristic part 006SG is data in which displacement images to be applied to the displacement target image (in the case of this characteristic part 006SG, an image obtained by superimposing an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area (an image arranged in the displacement image creation area)) are arranged in chronological order.

In addition, if the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of a normal reach (step 006SGS942; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines at a predetermined ratio whether to select the displacement image data A for failed development of a super reach performance or the displacement image data B for failed development of a super reach performance as the displacement image data for failed development of a super reach performance (for notifying of non-execution of a super reach performance) (step 006SGS944). For example, the selection of the displacement image data A for failed development of a super reach performance may be determined at a ratio of 50%, and the selection of the displacement image data B for failed development of a super reach performance may be determined at a ratio of 50%.

Note that, in this feature section 006SG, an example is given of a form in which two displacement image data can be selected as the displacement image data for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance: displacement image data A for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance and displacement image data B for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be three or more displacement image data that can be selected as the displacement image data for a failed progression to a Super Reach performance.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the selection of the displacement image data A for the failed development of the super reach performance has been decided in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945). If the selection of the displacement image data A for the failed development of the super reach performance has been decided in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945; Y), the displacement image data A for the failed development of the super reach performance is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS946). If the selection of the displacement image data B for the failed development of the super reach performance has been decided (step 006SGS945; N), the displacement image data B for the failed development of the super reach performance is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS947).

In step 006SGS948, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the display image processing flag. Then, it selects the first displacement image from the selected displacement image data (step 006SGS949) and proceeds to step 006SGS951.

Also, if the display image processing flag is on in step 006SGS941 (step 006SGS941; Y), the performance control CPU 120 selects the next displacement image from the selected displacement image data and proceeds to step 006SGS951 (step 006SGS950).

In step 006SGS951, the performance control CPU 120 executes a displacement image drawing process. In this displacement image drawing process, the performance control CPU 120 creates a displacement target image by, for example, synthesizing (superimposing) an image arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 19-5 in the displacement image creation area, and executes a process of creating a displacement image by applying the displacement image selected in step 006SGS949 or step 006SGS950 to the image.

After executing the displacement image drawing process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952). Whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image can be determined, for example, by whether the displacement image selected in step 006SGS950 is the last displacement image in the displacement image data.

If the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; Y), the display image processing flag is turned off and the display image processing process is terminated (step 006SGS953); if the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is not the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; N), the display image processing process is terminated without going through step 006SGS953.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display of the decorative symbols in this characteristic section 006SG will be described with reference to Figs. 19-20 to 19-23. First, as shown in Figs. 19-20(A) and 19-20(B), in this characteristic section 006SG, the display mode of the decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the game state. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 19-20(A), when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state), a normal state decorative symbol combining a character image and a numerical image is displayed as the decorative symbol. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 19-20(B), when the game state is the time-saving state (low probability low base state or high probability high base state), a time-saving state decorative symbol consisting of only a numerical image is displayed as the decorative symbol.

In the variable display with the Super Reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 19-21 (A) and 19-21 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging in a reach combination, and then a middle decorative symbol with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative symbols stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. In the development suggestion performance, as shown in Figure 19-21 (C), the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is divided into a left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol, a middle area 006SG005C including the middle decorative symbol, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative symbol. Then, as shown in Figures 19-21(C) to 19-21(E), the image displayed in middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image contained in middle area 006SG005C) slides downward in stages, causing a development notification pattern (the pattern labeled "Development!" shown in Figures 19-21(C) to 19-21(E)) to move from above toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5, indicating that the development will progress to a Super Reach reach performance.

The development notification pattern in this feature part 006SG is a pattern that is displayed only when the development suggestion effect is being executed, and is not displayed during the execution period of other effects during the variable display.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (the left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R (the right decorative pattern and background image) slide upward.

The amount of sliding movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R increases as you progress through the first stage shown in Figure 19-21 (C), the second stage shown in Figure 19-21 (D), and the third stage shown in Figure 19-21 (E).

Then, when the third stage of sliding of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R is completed, the development notification symbol moves to the center of the display area of the image display device 5 (the center of the middle area 006SG005C), and the development of the Super Reach into a Reach performance is announced.

On the other hand, in a variable display with a normal reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 19-22 (A) and 19-22 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging in a reach combination, and then a middle decorative symbol with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative symbols stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. As a development suggestion performance, as shown in Figure 19-22 (C), the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is divided into a left area 006SG005L including the left decorative symbol, a middle area 006SG005C including the middle decorative symbol, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative symbol. Then, as shown in Figures 19-22(C) to 19-22(E), the image displayed in middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image contained in middle area 006SG005C) slides downward in stages, causing the development notification pattern, which notifies the player that the game will develop into a Super Reach reach performance, to move from above toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (the left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R (the right decorative pattern and background image) slide upward.

The amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R increases as it progresses through the first stage shown in Figure 19-22 (C) and the second stage shown in Figure 19-22 (D).

However, in the variable display of the normal reach, after the first stage of sliding movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R has been executed, or after the second stage of sliding movement has been executed, as shown in FIG. 19-22(E), the development suggestion performance ends without the third stage of sliding movement being executed, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in FIG. 19-22(B), and the decorative patterns and small patterns stop in a combination that indicates a miss.

As shown in Figs. 19-21(C) to 19-21(E), in this characteristic portion 006SG, the sliding movement amount of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R increases as the stages progress, but the present invention is not limited to this. The sliding movement amount of each image displayed in the left region 006SG005L, the middle region 006SG005C, and the right region 006SG005R may decrease as the stages progress, or the movement amount may increase or decrease only in any of the first to third stages.

In addition, in this characteristic section 006SG, an example is given of a form in which each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R can be slid up to three levels as a development suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of levels by which each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R can be slid as a development suggestion effect may be two levels or less or four levels or more.

As shown in Figures 19-21(C) to 19-21(E), in this characteristic part 006SG, the sliding direction of the image displayed in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R is exemplified as being opposite to that of the image displayed in the middle region 006SG005C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sliding direction of the image displayed in the left region 006SG005L and the right region 006SG005R may be the same as that of the image displayed in the middle region 006SG005C.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, an example has been given of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 for development suggestion effects when the game state is normal (low probability low base state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may also be displaced for development suggestion effects when the game state is a time-saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state).

As shown in Fig. 19-23(A) to Fig. 19-23(E), the development suggestion performance in this characteristic part 006SG is such that the first interface image 006SG005I including the first pending memory display area 006SG005D and the second pending memory display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, a decorative pattern including the above-mentioned development notification pattern is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a background image is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In other words, as shown in Figures 19-21 and 19-22, in both the case of variable display of the normal reach variation pattern and the case of variable display of the super reach variation pattern, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are images drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and are therefore asymmetrical in displacement. For this reason, while the decorative symbols move upward or downward as a development suggestion performance toward the top or bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, reducing visibility to the player, the first interface image 006SG005I remains displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and the second interface image 006SG005J remains displayed at the top right of the display area of the image display device 5, so the visibility of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J does not decrease.

As shown in Figures 19-21 and 19-22, in the variable display in the Super Reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the third stage, while in the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the first or second stage. Here, as mentioned above, the variable display in the Super Reach variation pattern is set to a higher rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state than the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, so in this feature part 006SG, the rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion performance.

In addition, in the development suggestion presentation of this feature part 006SG, the left area 006SG005L contains a left decorative pattern, the middle area 006SG005C contains a middle decorative pattern, and the right area 006SG005R contains a right decorative pattern, and these left, middle, and right decorative patterns, including the characters and numbers, slide along without being separated, preventing the left, middle, and right decorative patterns from being separated, which reduces the interest of the development suggestion presentation.

Note that, in this characteristic section 006SG, an example is shown in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R are moved upward or downward, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one or two of the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R may be moved upward or downward.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic section 006SG, specific effects that displace the display positions of the decorative symbols and background images (development suggestion effects in characteristic section 006SG, reach suggestion effects in variant 006SG-1, revival effects in variant 006SG-2, foresight notice effects in variant 006SG-3, promotion effects in variant 006SG-5, and temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects in variant 006SG-6) can be executed simply by using image data for displaying the decorative symbols and background images and displacement image data for displacing the display positions of these decorative symbols and background images, so the amount of data stored in the CGROM 205 can be reduced compared to when these specific effects are executed using dedicated data.

In particular, since this feature section 006SG is capable of displaying multiple images as background images on the image display device 5, it would normally be necessary to store in advance in CGROM 205 a presentation pattern for a specific presentation depending on when each background image is displayed or the variable display mode. However, with this feature section 006SG, the image displayed on the image display device 5 can be instantly displaced simply by using data for the displacement image, so the amount of data stored in CGROM 205 can be reduced. In addition, in this characteristic section 006SG, as game-related information, a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D capable of identifying the number of reserved first special symbols, a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U capable of identifying the number of reserved second special symbols, and a small pattern with a smaller display area than the decorative pattern are displayed on the image display device 5 are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as game-related information, a launch promotion display that prompts the player to launch (launch) the game ball toward the big winning opening or gate 41 because the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability change state, or a fourth pattern that can identify that a variable display is being executed, etc. may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority. In other words, they are asymmetric images for image displacement in the development suggestion performance in this feature part 006SG. Therefore, their display positions do not shift with the images in the left area 006SG005L, right area 006SG005R, and middle area 006SG005C, which are the objects of displacement, and it is possible to prevent game-related information, such as the number of reserved special symbols and the variable display of small symbols, from being difficult for the player to see when the development suggestion performance is being executed.

Furthermore, of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlapping with the image of the right area 006SG005R which slides upward during the development suggestion performance, but since the display position of the second interface image 006SG005J itself does not displace, the player can recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the second interface image 006SG005J without feeling any discomfort. On the other hand, the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R during the development suggestion performance, so the player can accurately recognize the first reserved memory display area 006SG005D, which identifiably displays the first reserved memory number in the first interface image 006SG005I, and the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U, which identifiably displays the second reserved memory number in a manner that allows the player to accurately recognize the first reserved memory number in the first interface image 006SG005I, without being affected by the displacement (slide movement) of the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R.

Also, as shown in Figures 19-21 and 19-23, the decorative symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when a development suggestion effect is being performed, the decorative symbols move upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, thereby reducing visibility and improving the presentation effect of the development suggestion effect. Furthermore, the small symbols are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and when a development suggestion effect is being performed, unlike the decorative symbols, they do not move from the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, so visibility does not decrease, and the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by viewing the small symbols even when a development suggestion effect is being performed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 19-21, the development suggestion effect of this feature part 006SG gradually increases the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R, improving the presentation effect of the development suggestion effect while emphasizing the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R at each stage, thereby further improving the presentation effect.

As shown in Figures 19-21 and 19-22, in the variable display in the super reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the third stage, while in the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, displacement image data is used for sliding the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R up to the first or second stage. Therefore, the proportion of the jackpot game state controlled varies depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion presentation. This allows the player to focus on the number of stages of movement of the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R in the development suggestion presentation, thereby increasing the presentation interest of the development suggestion presentation.

As shown in Figs. 19-21 and 19-22, when displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage is used, and when displacement image data in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage is used, the portions in which the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the first stage are the same, and the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R slide to the third stage are the same. When using displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage, the part in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage is the same as when using displacement image data in which the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the number of stages, etc., that the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage as a development suggestion presentation, thereby further increasing the interest of the development suggestion presentation.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 19-24 and 19-25 as modified example 006SG-1, a reach suggestion effect that suggests that a reach will occur during the variable display may be executed as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced.

The presentation mode of the reach suggestion presentation will be explained based on Figures 19-24 and 19-25. First, in the variable display with the variable pattern of normal reach or super reach, as shown in Figures 19-24(A) to 19-24(C), an action image such as a character acts on the left decorative pattern just before the left decorative pattern stops, causing the left decorative pattern to stop. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the left decorative pattern is displayed distorted.

Next, as shown in Figures 19-24(D) to 19-24(F), just before the right decorative symbol stops, an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative symbol, causing the right decorative symbol to stop and reach a winning state. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the right decorative symbol is displayed distorted.

On the other hand, in a variable display with a non-reach variable pattern, as shown in Figures 19-25(A) to 19-25(C), an action image such as a character acts on the left decorative pattern just before the left decorative pattern stops, causing the left decorative pattern to stop. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the left decorative pattern is displayed distorted.

Next, as shown in Figures 19-25(D) to 19-25(F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative pattern just before the right decorative pattern stops, but the right decorative pattern stops in a number of patterns that does not result in a reach combination. At this time, the right decorative pattern stops and a reach is reached. At this time, the part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the bottom of the right decorative pattern is displayed without distortion.

As shown in Figures 19-26(A) to 19-26(F), the reach indication performance in this modified example 006SG-1 is such that a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, an action image is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, a layer 4 image drawing area is arranged in the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-1 for drawing images lower than the layer 3 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement image is applied to the displacement target image to create a displacement image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, an example is given of a form in which a reach suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible not to execute a reach suggestion effect in some of the variable displays of the non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, an example of a reach suggestion effect is shown in which an action image such as a character acts on the left and right decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a reach suggestion effect in a variable display of a non-reach variation pattern, it is also possible to provide a case in which the action image acts on the decorative symbols only once (only acting on the left decorative symbol).

Moreover, in this modified example 006SG-1, an example is given of an action image such as a character acting on a decorative pattern as a reach suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple action images can be displayed as reach suggestion effects, and the rate at which a reach occurs can be varied depending on which action image acts on the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, in the case where an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect but the reach does not occur, an example is given in which the decorative pattern that acted and the part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern are not distorted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern that the action image acted on and the part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern may always be distorted regardless of whether the reach occurs or not.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, when an action image such as a character is used as a reach suggestion effect, the decorative pattern affected by the action image and a part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern are distorted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when an action image such as a character is used as a reach suggestion effect, only one of the decorative pattern affected by the action image and the part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern may be distorted.

In addition, in the characteristic section 213SG, an example of a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a Super Reach into a Reach effect is given as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 19-27 and 19-28 as modified example 006SG-2, a revival effect in which decorative symbols that were once displayed as a losing combination change into a winning combination may be executed as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced.

The presentation mode of the revival presentation will be explained based on Fig. 19-27 and Fig. 19-28. First, when the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in Fig. 19-27 (A), the variable display result is suggested to be a miss as a reach presentation of a normal reach or super reach, and then the decorative symbols are displayed in a swinging manner in a reach miss combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-27(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern in the middle, and the decorative pattern in the middle is split into multiple pieces along the crack effect image 006SG005H as a first-stage crack. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-27(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are enlarged and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 19-27(B) as a second-stage crack, and each piece moves so as to diffuse from the center of the image display device 5 in different directions.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 19-27(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are further enlarged and displayed from the state shown in Figure 19-27(C) as a third stage crack, and each piece moves to spread out further.

Then, as the fourth stage of cracking, an image of the fragments of the decorative pattern inside scattering and scattering is displayed, after which a new decorative pattern indicating a jackpot is displayed as the decorative pattern inside, and the variable display stops.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in Figure 19-28 (A), after the variable display result is suggested to be a miss as a reach effect for normal reach or super reach, the decorative patterns are displayed in a swaying manner in a reach miss combination.

Next, as shown in Fig. 19-28(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlapping the decorative pattern in the middle, and the decorative pattern in the middle is split into multiple fragments along the crack effect image 006SG005H as a first-stage crack. Then, as shown in Fig. 19-28(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are enlarged and displayed from the state shown in Fig. 19-28(B) as a second-stage crack, and each fragment moves so as to diffuse from the center of the image display device 5 in different directions.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 19-28(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each piece are further enlarged and displayed from the state shown in Figure 19-28(C) as a third stage crack, and each piece moves to spread out further.

However, in a variable display where the variable display result is a miss, after the first stage crack is executed, after the second stage crack is executed, or after the third stage crack is executed, the fourth stage crack is not executed, the revival performance ends, the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in Figure 19-28 (A), and the decorative pattern and small pattern stop in a combination that indicates a miss.

As shown in Figures 19-29(A) to 19-29(F), the revival performance in this modified example 006SG-2 involves drawing a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, drawing a crack effect image 006SG005H in the layer 2 image drawing area, and drawing a decorative pattern in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, a layer 4 image drawing area is arranged in the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-2 for drawing images lower than the layer 3 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created from the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image (an image in which the decorative pattern inside is split into multiple pieces and each piece is displayed as if it is diffusing).

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In particular, in this modified example 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside gradually expands as a revival effect. In other words, in the revival effect, the proportion of the display area of the decorative pattern inside to the display area of the image display device 5 increases gradually, so that the gradual expansion of the decorative pattern inside makes it possible to more effectively draw the player's attention to the revival effect.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, a form in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is superimposed on the decorative pattern in the middle as a revival performance is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple display modes of the crack effect image 006SG005H may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot may be varied depending on which display mode the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed in.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19-30, blue and red are set as the display colors for the crack effect image 006SG005H, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 20% of the time when the revival performance is executed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 80% of the time when the revival performance is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 80% of the time when the revival performance is executed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed 20% of the time when the revival performance is executed.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, two colors, red and blue, are used as the display colors for the crack effect image 006SG005H, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more colors may be used as the display colors for the crack effect image 006SG005H.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, an example is given of a form in which a revival effect is executed when the game state is in a time-saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a revival effect may also be executed when the game state is in a normal state (low probability low base state).

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, as shown in FIG. 19-28, the decorative pattern in the revival performance is composed of multiple fragments, and these fragments are moved in stages from the center to the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5 while maintaining the number of fragments as the revival performance progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiple fragments that make up the decorative pattern in the middle may increase in stages as the revival performance progresses. In this way, the visual effect of the number of fragments that make up the decorative pattern in the middle increasing as the revival performance progresses makes it possible to leave a strong impression of the revival performance on the player.

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a Super Reach into a Reach effect is exemplified as an effect that displaces the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 19-31 as modified example 006SG-3, an effect that displaces the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be a look-ahead preview effect that suggests from a variable display several times ago that a variable display will be executed in the variable pattern of a Super Reach in the reserved memory, or that a variable display that results in a jackpot will be executed.

The performance mode of the pre-reading preview performance will be explained based on FIG. 19-31. First, in a state where there are multiple reserved memories, as shown in FIG. 19-31(A) and FIG. 19-31(B), the variable display in progress stops with a combination of decorative symbols that is a miss. Next, as shown in FIG. 19-31(C) and FIG. 19-31(D), when the next variable display starts, in the display area of the image display device 5, the cutting effect image 006SG005S that crosses the display area from left to right is displayed overlapping with the decorative symbols and background image. Then, the display area displayed on the image display device 5, excluding the first interface image 006SG005I, is divided into a lower area 006SG005B below including the decorative symbols and part of the background image and an upper area 006SG005T above including the remaining decorative symbols and background image, with the cutting effect image 006SG005S as the boundary. In other words, the boundary between the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T above is hidden from the player by the cutting effect image 006SG005S.

As shown in Figures 19-31(D) to 19-31(E), the lower region 006SG005B simultaneously slides left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and the upper region 006SG005T simultaneously slides right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S. The lower region 006SG005B, which has slid left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, then slides downward, while the upper region 006SG005T, which has slid right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, further slides upward. At this time, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed moving so as to follow the boundary on both the lower region 006SG005B side and the upper region 006SG005T side.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-31(E) and FIG. 19-31(F), in the display area of the image display device 5, the display of a black image begins with the downward sliding movement of the lower area 006SG005B and the upward sliding movement of the upper area 006SG005T. The display area of the black image expands as the downward sliding movement of the lower area 006SG005B and the upward sliding movement of the upper area 006SG005T progresses, and when the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T have completed moving out of the display area, the display area appears in a so-called blacked-out state in which only the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are displayed.

After this, when the blackout ends, a new background image and decorative pattern will begin to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. This pre-reading preview performance will be repeated until the variable display of the outer pre-reading target begins.

As shown in Fig. 19-32(A) to Fig. 19-32(F), the preview performance in this modified example 006SG-3 is such that the first interface image 006SG005I including the first reserved memory display area 006SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and the second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-3 has a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing images below the layer 3 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing images even lower. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a black image (blackout image) is drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image including a lower area 006SG005B and an upper area 006SG005T is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

As described above, in this modified example 006SG-3, in the look-ahead preview performance as a specific performance of the present invention, as shown in Figures 19-31 (C) and 19-31 (D), decorative patterns and background images are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left, and a cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed at the boundary between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, so that the player can more effectively recognize the left and right lateral movement of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B as the look-ahead preview performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and positioned in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern and background image, so even if the display positions of the upper area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B are displaced, the display position of the cutting effect image 006SG005S does not displace. Therefore, by comparing the upper area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B with the cutting effect image 006SG005S, the displacement of the display positions of the upper area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B can be made more prominent, further improving the presentation effect of the pre-reading preview presentation.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 19-31 (D) and 19-31 (E), by moving the upper region 006SG005T to the right and the lower region 006SG005B to the left, and then further moving the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B upward and downward, respectively, the presentation effect of the pre-reading preview presentation can be further enhanced and the presentation interest can be increased. In particular, as shown in Figures 19-31 (D) and 19-31 (E), the upper region 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower region 006SG005B moves to the left, but the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction, so the displacement (movement) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B and the displacement (movement) of the boundary have a synergistic effect, which can further enhance the performance effect of the pre-reading preview.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, the movement direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is an up-down direction different from the right side, which is the movement direction of the upper region 006SG005T, and the left side, which is the movement direction of the lower region 006SG005B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the movement direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is different from either the movement direction of the upper region 006SG005T or the movement direction of the lower region 006SG005B.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, a cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 as a pre-reading preview performance, and the lower area 006SG005B and upper area 006SG005T divided along the cutting effect image 006SG005S are displayed movingly. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple display modes of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result in the pre-reading target variable display becomes a jackpot may be varied depending on which display mode the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19-33, three colors, blue, green, and red, are set as the display colors for the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and if the variable display result of the pre-read target is a jackpot, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue 10% of the time, in green 30% of the time, and in red 60% of the time. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the pre-read target is a miss, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue 60% of the time, in green 30% of the time, and in red 10% of the time.

By doing this, the player can be drawn to the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S that is displayed during the preview performance, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect of the preview performance.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, three colors, blue, green, and red, are used as the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be two colors or four or more colors. In addition, the rate at which the variable display result of the pre-read target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate) may be different depending on aspects other than color, such as the shape and size of the cutting effect image 006SG005S and the number of cutting effect images 006SG005S displayed.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, an example is given of the image displayed on the image display device 5 being divided into two areas along the cutting effect image 006SG005S as a pre-reading preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be divided into three or more areas as a pre-reading preview performance. In this case, the effect of the pre-reading preview performance may be improved by varying the direction in which each area slides.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, an example is shown in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved as a pre-reading preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area that moves as a pre-reading preview performance may be only one of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, decorative patterns and background images are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, and the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after being moved to the right is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after being moved to the left. Therefore, even if the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B, so that the pre-reading preview performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, an example is shown in which the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left may be the same. In this way, an element of surprise can be added to the pre-reading preview performance, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in Figures 19-31 (C) and 19-31 (D), at the timing before the execution of the pre-reading preview performance, the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 is the same as the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left as a pre-reading preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not necessary for a part of the image displayed across the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at the timing before the execution of the pre-reading preview performance to be displayed across the upper region 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower region 006SG005B after moving to the left as a pre-reading preview performance. By doing this, it is possible to increase the interest of the preview performance.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a pre-reading preview performance (in Figure 19-31 (D), the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the left, and in Figure 19-31 (E), the upper area 006SG005T is moved upward and the lower area 006SG005B is moved downward), the amount of movement (displacement) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement amount (displacement amount) of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B when they are moved in opposite directions as a look-ahead preview performance may be different. In this way, by making the movement amount of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, which move in opposite directions as a look-ahead preview performance, different, the performance effect of the look-ahead preview performance can be further improved.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in FIG. 19-33, an example is given in which the rate at which the variable display result of the pre-read target becomes a jackpot is varied depending on the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 19-34 as modified example 006SG-4, the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S may be changed each time the variable display is executed. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result of the pre-read target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate) may be varied depending on the final display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S and the change pattern of the display color.

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, an example of a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is given as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 19-35 as modified example 006SG-5, as an effect in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced, a promotion effect (also called a re-draw effect) may be executed in which decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot type such as a non-variable jackpot or a 2-round variable jackpot with a small number of rounds during the variable display, and then the left, center, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner in a state where they are aligned in a combination that indicates a jackpot, and the final combination of decorative patterns that stops indicates the jackpot type.

The presentation mode of the promotion presentation will be explained based on Fig. 19-35. First, the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as a normal reach or super reach presentation, and then, as shown in Fig. 19-35(A), after the end of these reach presentations, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot type that is relatively less advantageous to the player, such as a non-variable jackpot or a two-round variable jackpot (in the example shown in Fig. 19-35(A), the combination is the even number "2" that indicates a non-variable jackpot).

Then, as shown in FIG. 19-35(B), during the remaining period of the variable display, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are displayed variably at a uniform speed as a promotion effect, including combinations of decorative symbols for other jackpot types, such as 2-round special jackpot, 5-round special jackpot, and 10-round special jackpot.

While the promotion effect is being performed, as shown in Figures 19-35(C) and 19-35(D), the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left in two stages.

If the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot type indicated by the combination of decorative symbols displayed first (see FIG. 19-35(A)), the decorative symbols will stop with that jackpot type combination (a sure-win combination in the example shown in FIG. 19-35(E)) after the first or second stage distortion of the promotion effect. On the other hand, if the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is the same as the jackpot type indicated by the combination of decorative symbols displayed first, the decorative symbols will stop with that jackpot type combination (a non- sure-win combination in the example shown in FIG. 19-35(F)) after the first stage distortion of the promotion effect.

In addition, the "degree of advantage to the player" between the types of jackpots in this modified example 006SG-5 refers to whether or not the jackpot is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot play ends, the number of variable display times that are controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot play ends, and the number of rounds in the jackpot play.

As shown in Figures 19-36(A) to 19-36(E), the promotion effect in this modified example 006SG-5 involves drawing a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area, drawing a decorative pattern in the layer 2 image drawing area, and drawing a background image in the layer 3 image drawing area.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image to create a displacement image in which the vertical center is distorted toward the left.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is an image that is longer in the left-right and up-down width directions than the display area of the image display device 5, as in the characteristic part 006SG (see Figure 19-19), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 19-37, the left-right dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 may be the same as the left-right dimension of the display area of the image display device 5.

In this case, when the promotion effect is executed as described above, as shown in Figures 19-38(A) to 19-38(C), when the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left as a promotion effect, a non-image display area in which no image is displayed is formed on the right side of the display area.

In this case, when the horizontal dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the horizontal dimension of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 19-37, as shown in FIG. 19-39(A) to FIG. 19-39(D), when the promotion effect is executed, the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, or the displacement target image (background image and decorative pattern) created in the displacement image creation area is enlarged, thereby placing a part of the background image outside the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, even if the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left side as a promotion effect by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, the background image arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5 due to the enlargement is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, thereby reducing the risk of inappropriate display on the image display device 5, such as the formation of the above-mentioned non-display area.

In addition, in Figures 19-39, an example is shown in which both the background image and the decorative pattern are enlarged to prevent the formation of a non-image area where no image is displayed on the right side of the display area when the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted toward the left as a promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the background image may be enlarged to prevent the formation of a non-image area.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, when a promotion effect is executed, an image for the promotion effect is created by applying a displacement image to the entire image to be displaced that has been enlarged so that its left-right dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of the image to be displaced to which the displacement image is applied is limited to only the portion of the image to be displaced that corresponds to the display area of the image display device 5, that is, it is not necessary to displace the image to the extent that it is outside the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, in the case where the horizontal dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the horizontal dimension of the display area of the image display device 5, when the promotion performance is executed, the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged to prevent the formation of a non-image part during the execution of the promotion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative pattern drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area may be enlarged in stages according to the progress of the promotion performance (according to the increase in the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5). In this way, the sense of incongruity caused by the decorative pattern and background image being suddenly enlarged and displayed on the image display device 5 can be reduced, so that it is possible to prevent an inappropriate display such as the display of a non-image part on the image display device 5 in the process of increasing the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 while maintaining the performance effect of the promotion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 006SG, an example was given of a form in which a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of the reach effect of the super reach during variable display can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a pseudo consecutive effect including a temporary stop of the decorative pattern and re-variable display can be executed during variable display, and the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (the probability of a jackpot) can be varied depending on the number of times the pseudo consecutive effect is executed.

In particular, in a variable display that executes such pseudo consecutive effects, it may be possible to execute a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the decorative pattern will temporarily stop just before the timing of the decorative pattern's temporary stop, or a temporary stop notification effect that notifies the user of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern when the decorative pattern has temporarily stopped.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, when a promotion effect is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged, and part of the display image is arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5, thereby preventing the formation of a non-display area during the execution of the promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image larger in size than the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of modified example 006SG-5, the left and right dimensions are at least longer than the left and right dimensions of the display area of the image display device 5) may be stored in advance in CGROM 205 as an image for the promotion effect, and the image may be drawn and arranged in the displacement image creation area or display image creation area to prevent the formation of a non-display area during the execution of the promotion effect.

Furthermore, in this modified example 006SG-5, when a promotion performance is executed, the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 is enlarged, and a part of the display image is arranged outside the display area of the image display device 5, thereby preventing the formation of a non-display image area during the execution of the promotion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a promotion performance is executed, an image (non-display image) different from the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5 may be arranged adjacent to the display image in a position outside the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of this modified example 006SG-5, the right outer side of the display area of the image display device 5) in the display image creation area. In this way, when a promotion performance is executed, the display image and the non-display image are arranged adjacent to each other across the display area and non-display area of the image display device 5, so that a part of the non-display image is displayed instead of the non-display image area.

In the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect that displaces the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 19-40 to 19-42 as modified example 006SG-6, these tentative stop suggestion effects and tentative stop notification effects may be executed as effects that displace the image displayed on the image display device 5.

The presentation mode of the tentative stop suggestion presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 19-40. First, as shown in FIG. 19-40(A), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the left and right decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) and a reach is reached. After that, as a tentative stop suggestion presentation, a pseudo consecutive symbol (the symbol displayed as "NEXT"), which is part of the decorative symbol, moves from above to below. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a ripple effect image 006SG005P converging from the periphery of the display area to the center of the display area, and the image around the ripple effect image 006SG005P (the left and right decorative symbols and the background image) is displayed distorted.

If the variable display is a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance (a variable display in which the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop), as shown in FIG. 19-40(B), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, and a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display that does not execute a pseudo consecutive performance (a variable display in which the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop), as shown in FIG. 19-40(C), the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, but move downward in the display area of the image display device 5 and become invisible, and a symbol indicating that the variable display result is a miss is displayed as a decorative symbol inside.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-6, as shown in FIG. 19-40, a form is exemplified in which a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed on the image display device 5 to suggest that the decorative pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) will temporarily stop, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display forms for the ripple effect image 006SG005P may be provided, and the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) temporarily stops may be varied depending on which display form the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed in as a pseudo consecutive suggestion performance.

For example, in FIG. 19-40, two ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed (double display) as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, but as shown in FIG. 19-41, it is possible to provide a case where only one ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, and the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) temporarily stops can be varied according to the number of ripple effect images 006SG005P displayed in the pseudo consecutive effect.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-6, the pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed as part of the decorative pattern, in other words, the pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed as part of the variable display even during periods other than the pseudo consecutive performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive pattern may be a pattern different from the decorative pattern and a special pattern that is displayed only during the pseudo consecutive performance.

As shown in Figures 19-42(A) and 19-42(B), after the temporary stop indication effect is executed and the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed diffusing from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to the periphery of the display area, and the image around the ripple effect image 006SG005P (the decorative symbols on the left and right and the background image) is displayed distorted.

As shown in Figures 19-43(A) to 19-43(F), the temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects in this modified example 006SG-6 are as follows: a first interface image 006SG005I including a first pending memory display area 006SG005D and a second pending memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area; a ripple effect image 006SG005P is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area; and a decorative pattern including a pseudo consecutive pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, a layer 4 image drawing area is arranged in the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-6 for drawing images below the layer 3 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created using the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image (decorative pattern and background image distorted by ripple effect image 006SG005P) is created by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image.

Then, in the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed to create a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006GS, an example was given of a form in which a performance image is displayed using an image display device 5 capable of displaying only planar images, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 19-44 and 19-45 as modified example 006SG-7, a performance image may be displayed using a display device capable of displaying stereoscopic images.

Modification 006SG-7 will be described below. Note that in the characteristic part 006SG and the modification described above, the image display device 5 is exemplified as being an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) display device capable of displaying planar images (2D images). However, this modification 006SG-7 is characterized in that it is possible to display stereoscopic images (3D images) in addition to planar images (2D images) as various images by using a naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' that uses a parallax barrier method to enable the player to view stereoscopic images with the naked eye, as shown in FIG. 19-44.

As shown in FIG. 19-44, the naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' of this modified example 006SG-7 has a structure including an image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 capable of displaying a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image), a backlight 006SG901 that irradiates planar light from the rear of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 toward the front, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 that is provided on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 with a predetermined distance from the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900.

The parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is a relatively optically transparent liquid crystal panel that allows for a parallax barrier image display state in which a parallax barrier image is displayed, which has vertically striped black sections that act as shutters to prevent the right eye image (R image) displayed in the vertically long stripes on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 from being seen by the left eye of the player and the left eye image (L image) from being seen by the right eye of the player, and transparent sections that allow the right eye image to be seen by the right eye of the player and the left eye image to be seen by the left eye of the player, and a transparent display state in which all pixels are transparent and do not have vertically striped black sections.

The image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 can display, for example, a right eye image (R image) instead of a left eye image (L image), and the parallax barrier image described above is made non-display (fully transparent display) on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910, so that a planar image (2D image) can also be displayed.

In other words, the naked-eye stereoscopic image display device 5', which is the display means of this modified example 006SG-7, can display a naked-eye stereoscopic image composed of an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye in addition to a planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image.

The stereoscopic image consisting of a right-eye image and a left-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 is also drawn on each of the layers described above, just like the planar image (2D image), while the parallax barrier image displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is drawn on a dedicated layer provided exclusively for the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 and displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910.

When such a naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' is used to display a performance image, during variable display, other performances may be executed by displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) at a timing different from the specific performance (e.g., development suggestion performance) in the present invention.

As shown in Figures 19-45(A) to 19-45(D), during variable display, the naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' is capable of executing a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R that are displaced upward and the image of the center area 006SG005C that is displaced downward are displayed, as described above. In addition, a variable display preview effect is executed that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot as a preview effect whose execution period does not overlap with the development hint effect, and a stereoscopic image is displayed in the variable display preview effect.

In other words, when a development suggestion effect is executed, which is a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R that are displaced specific images and move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that is moved downward, are displayed, only the planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, is displayed, and the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed.

When the image of the left region 006SG005L and right region 006SG005R moving upward as a displacement specific image, and the image of the middle region 006SG005C moving downward as an image are displayed, the display is made to be a planar image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, thereby making it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the displacement is due to a stereoscopic image, and thus preventing a decrease in the interest of the presentation.

In this embodiment, since the execution period of the performance in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed differs from that of the development suggestion performance, which is a specific performance in which displacement specific images, images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R moved upward, and an image of the middle area 006SG005C moved downward, are displayed, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) is restricted based on the execution period of the performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a displacement specific image and a stereoscopic image (3D image) are displayed during the same performance, data such as a display in progress flag that can identify that a displacement specific image is being displayed may be stored so that the stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed while the displacement specific image is being displayed, and the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted based on the data. In addition, regarding these restrictions, in order to prevent a stereoscopic image (3D image) from being displayed immediately after or immediately before the display of the displacement specific image has ended, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) may be restricted by storing data such as a display flag for a specified period before and after the period during which the displacement specific image is displayed.

In the above-mentioned modified example 006SG-7, a parallax barrier type naked eye stereoscopic image display device 5' using the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and stereoscopic images (3D images) may be displayed using naked eye stereoscopic image display devices using a lenticular lens method or integral imaging method other than the parallax barrier method.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG0-7, a form in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed in the development suggestion performance has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a case in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed in the development suggestion performance may also be provided. In addition, if a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed in the development suggestion performance, the stereoscopic image (3D image) image (right eye image and left eye image) can be drawn and arranged in an image drawing area (for example, layer 1 image drawing area) that is higher than the image drawing area in which the planar image (2D image) is drawn and arranged. In this way, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed with priority over the planar image (2D image), so the stereoscopic image (3D image) can be displayed preferably in the development suggestion performance.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-7, as an example of a form in which a variable display preview effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot can be executed in a period different from the development suggestion effect (specific effect) as an effect that displays a stereoscopic image (3D image), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed as an introduction effect for the development suggestion effect (specific effect) in a period prior to the development suggestion effect (specific effect). In this way, the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) can make the player aware in advance that the development suggestion effect (specific effect) will be executed, thereby further improving the presentation effect of the development suggestion effect (specific effect). Furthermore, multiple presentation modes for the introduction effect and the development suggestion effect (specific effect) may be provided, and the practice mode of the development suggestion effect (specific effect) may be different depending on which presentation mode the introduction effect is executed in.

In addition, the introduction performance may be performed by operating the movable body 32, and the effects of the introduction performance and the development suggestion performance (specific performance) may be improved by coordinating the movement of the movable body 32 with the display of a stereoscopic image (3D image).

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, an example of the present invention being applied to a pachinko gaming machine 1 is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to a slot machine.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, as shown in FIG. 19-46 as modified example 006SG-8, the game-related information in the present invention (corresponding to the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J in the characteristic part 006SG) may display medal payout display, remaining number of games in the AT (assist time), medal display stored as credits, etc. together with the presentation image on the image display device 5, and these game-related information may be treated as non-target images for displacement.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each of the modified examples, an example is given of a form in which a special effect of the present invention is performed in which the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed or distorted (distorted), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a special effect may be performed in which the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is repeatedly changed or distorted.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modified example, the development suggestion effect, reach suggestion effect, revival effect, look-ahead notice effect, promotion effect, temporary stop suggestion effect, and temporary stop notification effect are exemplified as specific effects in the present invention, but multiple effects may be executed as these specific effects. In addition, when multiple specific effects are executed in this way, for example, in the normal state, an effect in which the decorative pattern (characters and numbers) such as the development suggestion effect is not divided can be executed in the normal state, while an effect in which the decorative pattern (only numbers) is divided into multiple pieces or display areas such as the revival effect and look-ahead notice effect can be executed. In this way, in the normal state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the specific effect due to the decorative pattern including characters and numbers not being divided, and conversely, in the time-saving state, the effect of the specific effect can be improved by dividing the decorative pattern of only numbers.

In addition, in the characteristic section 006SG, an example was given of a form in which the decorative pattern is composed of characters and numbers in the normal state, and is composed of only numbers in the time-saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed midway through the variable display in a specific variable pattern, such as the variable display in the variable pattern of a super reach. For example, in the variable display of a super reach, a variable display of a decorative pattern composed of characters and numbers may be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, and a variable display of a decorative pattern composed of only numbers may be executed during the period after the reach. Furthermore, during the period after the reach, it may be possible to execute an effect in which the decorative pattern is divided, such as a revival effect, as a specific effect in this invention.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modified example, an example is given of an image in which at least a part of the specific image in the present invention is displaced in the left-right direction or the up-down direction and displayed as a displaced specific image on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an image in which at least a part of the specific image is enlarged or reduced may be displayed as a displaced specific image on the image display device 5. In other words, the displacement direction of the image in the present invention may include the enlargement/reduction direction (Z-axis direction) in addition to the left-right direction (X-axis direction) and the up-down direction (Y-axis direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG, as shown in Fig. 19-3 and Fig. 19-4, a form of generating a displacement image by a replacement method in which pixel X corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image is identified from a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image according to the R value and G value of the pixel A, and the pixel X is displaced (replaced) to a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a displacement image may be generated by a method (movement method) in which pixel X at a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement image in the displacement target image is moved to a position corresponding to the R value and G value of the pixel A. Note that, in the replacement method, as in modified example 006SG-3, it is necessary to edit the displacement image of the area close to the boundary into a displacement image that takes into account the width of the boundary of the area with different movement directions, whereas in the case of the replacement method, such editing is not necessary, so that the load of creating the image can be reduced, and in addition, when an effect image or the like is placed on the boundary, the degree of freedom of setting the boundary where the effect image is placed can be increased, so that the load of creating the image including the effect image can be reduced.

LIST OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning port 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board 13 ... Sound control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal pattern display device 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball hitting operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122...RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I/O
120 ... Performance control CPU
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A suggestion performance execution means for suggesting that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state and capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including at least a first suggestion performance and a second suggestion performance having different expectations depending on the performance mode;
A special image display effect execution means capable of displaying a special image;
A special effect execution means for executing a special effect that changes the suggestive effect being executed in one performance mode to a performance mode with a higher expectation than the one performance mode by using the displayed special image;
A special suggestion effect execution means is provided which is capable of executing a first special suggestion effect which suggests that the special effect will be executed and the special effect is executed after the effect, and a second special suggestion effect which suggests that the special effect will be executed and the special effect is not executed after the effect,
The special image display effect execution means displays the special image in a manner that the special image moves so as to pass through a display position of the suggestion effect that is a target of the special effect during a period before the special effect is executed,
The special effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect by a predetermined pattern of executing the special effect by changing the presentation mode of the first suggestion effect after the special image is stopped at a specific position, and a specific pattern of executing the special effect by changing the presentation mode of the second suggestion effect after the special image passes the specific position without being stopped at the specific position,
The ratio of the special effect being controlled to the advantageous state when the special effect is executed according to the predetermined pattern is different from the ratio of the special effect being executed according to the specific pattern,
The special effect execution means is capable of displaying a specific image when executing the special effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images